| 1 |
14 |
jlechner |
% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
|
| 2 |
|
|
%
|
| 3 |
|
|
% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
|
| 4 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
|
| 5 |
|
|
%
|
| 6 |
|
|
\def\texinfoversion{2002-06-04.06}
|
| 7 |
|
|
%
|
| 8 |
|
|
% Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 88, 90, 91, 92, 93, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99,
|
| 9 |
|
|
% 2000, 01, 02 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
|
| 10 |
|
|
%
|
| 11 |
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
|
| 12 |
|
|
% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
|
| 13 |
|
|
% published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at
|
| 14 |
|
|
% your option) any later version.
|
| 15 |
|
|
%
|
| 16 |
|
|
% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
|
| 17 |
|
|
% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
|
| 18 |
|
|
% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
|
| 19 |
|
|
% General Public License for more details.
|
| 20 |
|
|
%
|
| 21 |
|
|
% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
|
| 22 |
|
|
% along with this texinfo.tex file; see the file COPYING. If not, write
|
| 23 |
|
|
% to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor,
|
| 24 |
|
|
% Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.
|
| 25 |
|
|
%
|
| 26 |
|
|
% In other words, you are welcome to use, share and improve this program.
|
| 27 |
|
|
% You are forbidden to forbid anyone else to use, share and improve
|
| 28 |
|
|
% what you give them. Help stamp out software-hoarding!
|
| 29 |
|
|
%
|
| 30 |
|
|
% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
|
| 31 |
|
|
% reports; you can get the latest version from:
|
| 32 |
|
|
% ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo.tex
|
| 33 |
|
|
% (and all GNU mirrors, see http://www.gnu.org/order/ftp.html)
|
| 34 |
|
|
% ftp://texinfo.org/texinfo/texinfo.tex
|
| 35 |
|
|
% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
|
| 36 |
|
|
% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org),
|
| 37 |
|
|
% and /home/gd/gnu/doc/texinfo.tex on the GNU machines.
|
| 38 |
|
|
%
|
| 39 |
|
|
% The texinfo.tex in any given Texinfo distribution could well be out
|
| 40 |
|
|
% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
|
| 41 |
|
|
%
|
| 42 |
|
|
% Texinfo has a small home page at http://texinfo.org/ and also
|
| 43 |
|
|
% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
|
| 44 |
|
|
%
|
| 45 |
|
|
% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org. Please include including a
|
| 46 |
|
|
% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
|
| 47 |
|
|
% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
|
| 48 |
|
|
%
|
| 49 |
|
|
% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
|
| 50 |
|
|
% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
|
| 51 |
|
|
% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
|
| 52 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
| 53 |
|
|
% texindex foo.??
|
| 54 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
| 55 |
|
|
% tex foo.texi
|
| 56 |
|
|
% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
|
| 57 |
|
|
% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
|
| 58 |
|
|
% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
|
| 59 |
|
|
% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
|
| 60 |
|
|
%
|
| 61 |
|
|
% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages. You can get
|
| 62 |
|
|
% the existing language-specific files from the full Texinfo distribution.
|
| 63 |
|
|
|
| 64 |
|
|
\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
|
| 65 |
|
|
|
| 66 |
|
|
% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
|
| 67 |
|
|
% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
|
| 68 |
|
|
% they might have appeared in the input file name.
|
| 69 |
|
|
\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
|
| 70 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
|
| 71 |
|
|
|
| 72 |
|
|
% Save some parts of plain tex whose names we will redefine.
|
| 73 |
|
|
\let\ptexb=\b
|
| 74 |
|
|
\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
|
| 75 |
|
|
\let\ptexc=\c
|
| 76 |
|
|
\let\ptexcomma=\,
|
| 77 |
|
|
\let\ptexdot=\.
|
| 78 |
|
|
\let\ptexdots=\dots
|
| 79 |
|
|
\let\ptexend=\end
|
| 80 |
|
|
\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
|
| 81 |
|
|
\let\ptexexclam=\!
|
| 82 |
|
|
\let\ptexi=\i
|
| 83 |
|
|
\let\ptexlbrace=\{
|
| 84 |
|
|
\let\ptexrbrace=\}
|
| 85 |
|
|
\let\ptexstar=\*
|
| 86 |
|
|
\let\ptext=\t
|
| 87 |
|
|
|
| 88 |
|
|
% We never want plain's outer \+ definition in Texinfo.
|
| 89 |
|
|
% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
|
| 90 |
|
|
\let\+ = \relax
|
| 91 |
|
|
|
| 92 |
|
|
\message{Basics,}
|
| 93 |
|
|
\chardef\other=12
|
| 94 |
|
|
|
| 95 |
|
|
% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
|
| 96 |
|
|
% starts a new line in the output.
|
| 97 |
|
|
\newlinechar = `^^J
|
| 98 |
|
|
|
| 99 |
|
|
% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
|
| 100 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
|
| 101 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
|
| 102 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
|
| 103 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
|
| 104 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
|
| 105 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
|
| 106 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
|
| 107 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
|
| 108 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
|
| 109 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
|
| 110 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
|
| 111 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
|
| 112 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
|
| 113 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
|
| 114 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
|
| 115 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
|
| 116 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
|
| 117 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
|
| 118 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
|
| 119 |
|
|
%
|
| 120 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
|
| 121 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
|
| 122 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
|
| 123 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
|
| 124 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
|
| 125 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
|
| 126 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
|
| 127 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
|
| 128 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
|
| 129 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
|
| 130 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
|
| 131 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
|
| 132 |
|
|
%
|
| 133 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
|
| 134 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
|
| 135 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
|
| 136 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
|
| 137 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeftypevar\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypevar{Variable}\fi
|
| 138 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
|
| 139 |
|
|
\ifx\putwordDeftypefun\undefined\gdef\putwordDeftypefun{Function}\fi
|
| 140 |
|
|
|
| 141 |
|
|
% Ignore a token.
|
| 142 |
|
|
%
|
| 143 |
|
|
\def\gobble#1{}
|
| 144 |
|
|
|
| 145 |
|
|
\hyphenation{ap-pen-dix}
|
| 146 |
|
|
\hyphenation{mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers}
|
| 147 |
|
|
\hyphenation{eshell}
|
| 148 |
|
|
\hyphenation{white-space}
|
| 149 |
|
|
|
| 150 |
|
|
% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
|
| 151 |
|
|
\newdimen \bindingoffset
|
| 152 |
|
|
\newdimen \normaloffset
|
| 153 |
|
|
\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
|
| 154 |
|
|
|
| 155 |
|
|
% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
|
| 156 |
|
|
% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
|
| 157 |
|
|
% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.
|
| 158 |
|
|
%
|
| 159 |
|
|
\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
|
| 160 |
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
| 161 |
|
|
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands2 \tracingstats2
|
| 162 |
|
|
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
| 163 |
|
|
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
| 164 |
|
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
| 165 |
|
|
}%
|
| 166 |
|
|
\else
|
| 167 |
|
|
\def\loggingall{\tracingcommands3 \tracingstats2
|
| 168 |
|
|
\tracingpages1 \tracingoutput1 \tracinglostchars1
|
| 169 |
|
|
\tracingmacros2 \tracingparagraphs1 \tracingrestores1
|
| 170 |
|
|
\tracingscantokens1 \tracingassigns1 \tracingifs1
|
| 171 |
|
|
\tracinggroups1 \tracingnesting2
|
| 172 |
|
|
\showboxbreadth\maxdimen\showboxdepth\maxdimen
|
| 173 |
|
|
}%
|
| 174 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 175 |
|
|
|
| 176 |
|
|
% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
|
| 177 |
|
|
% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
|
| 178 |
|
|
%
|
| 179 |
|
|
\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
|
| 180 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
|
| 181 |
|
|
\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
|
| 182 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
|
| 183 |
|
|
\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
|
| 184 |
|
|
\removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
|
| 185 |
|
|
|
| 186 |
|
|
% For @cropmarks command.
|
| 187 |
|
|
% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
|
| 188 |
|
|
%
|
| 189 |
|
|
\newif\ifcropmarks
|
| 190 |
|
|
\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
|
| 191 |
|
|
%
|
| 192 |
|
|
% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
|
| 193 |
|
|
% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
|
| 194 |
|
|
%
|
| 195 |
|
|
\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
|
| 196 |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
|
| 197 |
|
|
\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
|
| 198 |
|
|
\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
|
| 199 |
|
|
|
| 200 |
|
|
% Main output routine.
|
| 201 |
|
|
\chardef\PAGE = 255
|
| 202 |
|
|
\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
|
| 203 |
|
|
|
| 204 |
|
|
\newbox\headlinebox
|
| 205 |
|
|
\newbox\footlinebox
|
| 206 |
|
|
|
| 207 |
|
|
% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
|
| 208 |
|
|
% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
|
| 209 |
|
|
\def\onepageout#1{%
|
| 210 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
|
| 211 |
|
|
%
|
| 212 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
|
| 213 |
|
|
\else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
|
| 214 |
|
|
%
|
| 215 |
|
|
% Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
|
| 216 |
|
|
% the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
|
| 217 |
|
|
\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
|
| 218 |
|
|
\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
|
| 219 |
|
|
%
|
| 220 |
|
|
{%
|
| 221 |
|
|
% Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
|
| 222 |
|
|
% take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
|
| 223 |
|
|
% before the \shipout runs.
|
| 224 |
|
|
%
|
| 225 |
|
|
\escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
|
| 226 |
|
|
\indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
|
| 227 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
|
| 228 |
|
|
% the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
|
| 229 |
|
|
\shipout\vbox{%
|
| 230 |
|
|
% Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
|
| 231 |
|
|
\ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfmkdest{\the\pageno} \fi
|
| 232 |
|
|
%
|
| 233 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
|
| 234 |
|
|
\hsize = \outerhsize
|
| 235 |
|
|
\vskip-\topandbottommargin
|
| 236 |
|
|
\vtop to0pt{%
|
| 237 |
|
|
\line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
|
| 238 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
| 239 |
|
|
\line{%
|
| 240 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
| 241 |
|
|
\hfill
|
| 242 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
|
| 243 |
|
|
}%
|
| 244 |
|
|
\vss}%
|
| 245 |
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin
|
| 246 |
|
|
\line\bgroup
|
| 247 |
|
|
\hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
|
| 248 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
|
| 249 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
| 250 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 251 |
|
|
%
|
| 252 |
|
|
\unvbox\headlinebox
|
| 253 |
|
|
\pagebody{#1}%
|
| 254 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
|
| 255 |
|
|
% Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
|
| 256 |
|
|
% (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingxxx.)
|
| 257 |
|
|
% The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
|
| 258 |
|
|
\vskip 2\baselineskip
|
| 259 |
|
|
\unvbox\footlinebox
|
| 260 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 261 |
|
|
%
|
| 262 |
|
|
\ifcropmarks
|
| 263 |
|
|
\egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
|
| 264 |
|
|
\hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
|
| 265 |
|
|
\vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
|
| 266 |
|
|
\boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
|
| 267 |
|
|
\vbox to0pt{\vss
|
| 268 |
|
|
\line{%
|
| 269 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
| 270 |
|
|
\hfill
|
| 271 |
|
|
\vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
|
| 272 |
|
|
}%
|
| 273 |
|
|
\nointerlineskip
|
| 274 |
|
|
\line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
|
| 275 |
|
|
}%
|
| 276 |
|
|
\egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
|
| 277 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 278 |
|
|
}% end of \shipout\vbox
|
| 279 |
|
|
}% end of group with \turnoffactive
|
| 280 |
|
|
\advancepageno
|
| 281 |
|
|
\ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
|
| 282 |
|
|
}
|
| 283 |
|
|
|
| 284 |
|
|
\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
|
| 285 |
|
|
|
| 286 |
|
|
\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
|
| 287 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@ =11
|
| 288 |
|
|
\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
|
| 289 |
|
|
% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
|
| 290 |
|
|
\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
|
| 291 |
|
|
\rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
|
| 292 |
|
|
\dimen@=\dp#1 \unvbox#1
|
| 293 |
|
|
\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
|
| 294 |
|
|
\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
|
| 295 |
|
|
}
|
| 296 |
|
|
|
| 297 |
|
|
% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
|
| 298 |
|
|
% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
|
| 299 |
|
|
% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
|
| 300 |
|
|
%
|
| 301 |
|
|
\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
|
| 302 |
|
|
\def\nstop{\vbox
|
| 303 |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
|
| 304 |
|
|
\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
|
| 305 |
|
|
\def\nsbot{\vbox
|
| 306 |
|
|
{\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
|
| 307 |
|
|
|
| 308 |
|
|
% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
|
| 309 |
|
|
% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
|
| 310 |
|
|
% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
|
| 311 |
|
|
%
|
| 312 |
|
|
\def\parsearg#1{%
|
| 313 |
|
|
\let\next = #1%
|
| 314 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 315 |
|
|
\obeylines
|
| 316 |
|
|
\futurelet\temp\parseargx
|
| 317 |
|
|
}
|
| 318 |
|
|
|
| 319 |
|
|
% If the next token is an obeyed space (from an @example environment or
|
| 320 |
|
|
% the like), remove it and recurse. Otherwise, we're done.
|
| 321 |
|
|
\def\parseargx{%
|
| 322 |
|
|
% \obeyedspace is defined far below, after the definition of \sepspaces.
|
| 323 |
|
|
\ifx\obeyedspace\temp
|
| 324 |
|
|
\expandafter\parseargdiscardspace
|
| 325 |
|
|
\else
|
| 326 |
|
|
\expandafter\parseargline
|
| 327 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 328 |
|
|
}
|
| 329 |
|
|
|
| 330 |
|
|
% Remove a single space (as the delimiter token to the macro call).
|
| 331 |
|
|
{\obeyspaces %
|
| 332 |
|
|
\gdef\parseargdiscardspace {\futurelet\temp\parseargx}}
|
| 333 |
|
|
|
| 334 |
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
| 335 |
|
|
\gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
|
| 336 |
|
|
\endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
|
| 337 |
|
|
%
|
| 338 |
|
|
% First remove any @c comment, then any @comment.
|
| 339 |
|
|
% Result of each macro is put in \toks0.
|
| 340 |
|
|
\argremovec #1\c\relax %
|
| 341 |
|
|
\expandafter\argremovecomment \the\toks0 \comment\relax %
|
| 342 |
|
|
%
|
| 343 |
|
|
% Call the caller's macro, saved as \next in \parsearg.
|
| 344 |
|
|
\expandafter\next\expandafter{\the\toks0}%
|
| 345 |
|
|
}%
|
| 346 |
|
|
}
|
| 347 |
|
|
|
| 348 |
|
|
% Since all \c{,omment} does is throw away the argument, we can let TeX
|
| 349 |
|
|
% do that for us. The \relax here is matched by the \relax in the call
|
| 350 |
|
|
% in \parseargline; it could be more or less anything, its purpose is
|
| 351 |
|
|
% just to delimit the argument to the \c.
|
| 352 |
|
|
\def\argremovec#1\c#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
| 353 |
|
|
\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\relax{\toks0 = {#1}}
|
| 354 |
|
|
|
| 355 |
|
|
% \argremovec{,omment} might leave us with trailing spaces, though; e.g.,
|
| 356 |
|
|
% @end itemize @c foo
|
| 357 |
|
|
% will have two active spaces as part of the argument with the
|
| 358 |
|
|
% `itemize'. Here we remove all active spaces from #1, and assign the
|
| 359 |
|
|
% result to \toks0.
|
| 360 |
|
|
%
|
| 361 |
|
|
% This loses if there are any *other* active characters besides spaces
|
| 362 |
|
|
% in the argument -- _ ^ +, for example -- since they get expanded.
|
| 363 |
|
|
% Fortunately, Texinfo does not define any such commands. (If it ever
|
| 364 |
|
|
% does, the catcode of the characters in questionwill have to be changed
|
| 365 |
|
|
% here.) But this means we cannot call \removeactivespaces as part of
|
| 366 |
|
|
% \argremovec{,omment}, since @c uses \parsearg, and thus the argument
|
| 367 |
|
|
% that \parsearg gets might well have any character at all in it.
|
| 368 |
|
|
%
|
| 369 |
|
|
\def\removeactivespaces#1{%
|
| 370 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 371 |
|
|
\ignoreactivespaces
|
| 372 |
|
|
\edef\temp{#1}%
|
| 373 |
|
|
\global\toks0 = \expandafter{\temp}%
|
| 374 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 375 |
|
|
}
|
| 376 |
|
|
|
| 377 |
|
|
% Change the active space to expand to nothing.
|
| 378 |
|
|
%
|
| 379 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 380 |
|
|
\obeyspaces
|
| 381 |
|
|
\gdef\ignoreactivespaces{\obeyspaces\let =\empty}
|
| 382 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 383 |
|
|
|
| 384 |
|
|
|
| 385 |
|
|
\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
|
| 386 |
|
|
|
| 387 |
|
|
%% These are used to keep @begin/@end levels from running away
|
| 388 |
|
|
%% Call \inENV within environments (after a \begingroup)
|
| 389 |
|
|
\newif\ifENV \ENVfalse \def\inENV{\ifENV\relax\else\ENVtrue\fi}
|
| 390 |
|
|
\def\ENVcheck{%
|
| 391 |
|
|
\ifENV\errmessage{Still within an environment; press RETURN to continue}
|
| 392 |
|
|
\endgroup\fi} % This is not perfect, but it should reduce lossage
|
| 393 |
|
|
|
| 394 |
|
|
% @begin foo is the same as @foo, for now.
|
| 395 |
|
|
\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
|
| 396 |
|
|
|
| 397 |
|
|
\outer\def\begin{\parsearg\beginxxx}
|
| 398 |
|
|
|
| 399 |
|
|
\def\beginxxx #1{%
|
| 400 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
|
| 401 |
|
|
{\errhelp=\EMsimple \errmessage{Undefined command @begin #1}}\else
|
| 402 |
|
|
\csname #1\endcsname\fi}
|
| 403 |
|
|
|
| 404 |
|
|
% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
|
| 405 |
|
|
%
|
| 406 |
|
|
\def\end{\parsearg\endxxx}
|
| 407 |
|
|
\def\endxxx #1{%
|
| 408 |
|
|
\removeactivespaces{#1}%
|
| 409 |
|
|
\edef\endthing{\the\toks0}%
|
| 410 |
|
|
%
|
| 411 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname E\endthing\endcsname\relax
|
| 412 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname \endthing\endcsname\relax
|
| 413 |
|
|
% There's no \foo, i.e., no ``environment'' foo.
|
| 414 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 415 |
|
|
\errmessage{Undefined command `@end \endthing'}%
|
| 416 |
|
|
\else
|
| 417 |
|
|
\unmatchedenderror\endthing
|
| 418 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 419 |
|
|
\else
|
| 420 |
|
|
% Everything's ok; the right environment has been started.
|
| 421 |
|
|
\csname E\endthing\endcsname
|
| 422 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 423 |
|
|
}
|
| 424 |
|
|
|
| 425 |
|
|
% There is an environment #1, but it hasn't been started. Give an error.
|
| 426 |
|
|
%
|
| 427 |
|
|
\def\unmatchedenderror#1{%
|
| 428 |
|
|
\errhelp = \EMsimple
|
| 429 |
|
|
\errmessage{This `@end #1' doesn't have a matching `@#1'}%
|
| 430 |
|
|
}
|
| 431 |
|
|
|
| 432 |
|
|
% Define the control sequence \E#1 to give an unmatched @end error.
|
| 433 |
|
|
%
|
| 434 |
|
|
\def\defineunmatchedend#1{%
|
| 435 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\unmatchedenderror{#1}}%
|
| 436 |
|
|
}
|
| 437 |
|
|
|
| 438 |
|
|
|
| 439 |
|
|
% Single-spacing is done by various environments (specifically, in
|
| 440 |
|
|
% \nonfillstart and \quotations).
|
| 441 |
|
|
\newskip\singlespaceskip \singlespaceskip = 12.5pt
|
| 442 |
|
|
\def\singlespace{%
|
| 443 |
|
|
% Why was this kern here? It messes up equalizing space above and below
|
| 444 |
|
|
% environments. --karl, 6may93
|
| 445 |
|
|
%{\advance \baselineskip by -\singlespaceskip
|
| 446 |
|
|
%\kern \baselineskip}%
|
| 447 |
|
|
\setleading\singlespaceskip
|
| 448 |
|
|
}
|
| 449 |
|
|
|
| 450 |
|
|
%% Simple single-character @ commands
|
| 451 |
|
|
|
| 452 |
|
|
% @@ prints an @
|
| 453 |
|
|
% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
|
| 454 |
|
|
\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
|
| 455 |
|
|
|
| 456 |
|
|
% This is turned off because it was never documented
|
| 457 |
|
|
% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
|
| 458 |
|
|
%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
|
| 459 |
|
|
%% but suppressing ligatures.
|
| 460 |
|
|
%\def\`{{`}}
|
| 461 |
|
|
%\def\'{{'}}
|
| 462 |
|
|
|
| 463 |
|
|
% Used to generate quoted braces.
|
| 464 |
|
|
\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
|
| 465 |
|
|
\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
|
| 466 |
|
|
\let\{=\mylbrace
|
| 467 |
|
|
\let\}=\myrbrace
|
| 468 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 469 |
|
|
% Definitions to produce actual \{ & \} command in an index.
|
| 470 |
|
|
\catcode`\{ = 12 \catcode`\} = 12
|
| 471 |
|
|
\catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
|
| 472 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = 0 \catcode`\\ = 12
|
| 473 |
|
|
@gdef@lbracecmd[\{]%
|
| 474 |
|
|
@gdef@rbracecmd[\}]%
|
| 475 |
|
|
@endgroup
|
| 476 |
|
|
|
| 477 |
|
|
% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
|
| 478 |
|
|
% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @v @H.
|
| 479 |
|
|
\let\, = \c
|
| 480 |
|
|
\let\dotaccent = \.
|
| 481 |
|
|
\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
|
| 482 |
|
|
\let\tieaccent = \t
|
| 483 |
|
|
\let\ubaraccent = \b
|
| 484 |
|
|
\let\udotaccent = \d
|
| 485 |
|
|
|
| 486 |
|
|
% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown
|
| 487 |
|
|
% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (and lowercase versions) @ss.
|
| 488 |
|
|
\def\questiondown{?`}
|
| 489 |
|
|
\def\exclamdown{!`}
|
| 490 |
|
|
|
| 491 |
|
|
% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
|
| 492 |
|
|
\def\imacro{i}
|
| 493 |
|
|
\def\jmacro{j}
|
| 494 |
|
|
\def\dotless#1{%
|
| 495 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 496 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\imacro \ptexi
|
| 497 |
|
|
\else\ifx\temp\jmacro \j
|
| 498 |
|
|
\else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
|
| 499 |
|
|
\fi\fi
|
| 500 |
|
|
}
|
| 501 |
|
|
|
| 502 |
|
|
% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
|
| 503 |
|
|
% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
|
| 504 |
|
|
% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
|
| 505 |
|
|
% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
|
| 506 |
|
|
% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
|
| 507 |
|
|
{\catcode`@ = 11
|
| 508 |
|
|
% Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
|
| 509 |
|
|
% if the definition is written into an index file.
|
| 510 |
|
|
\global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
|
| 511 |
|
|
\gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
|
| 512 |
|
|
}
|
| 513 |
|
|
|
| 514 |
|
|
% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
|
| 515 |
|
|
\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
|
| 516 |
|
|
|
| 517 |
|
|
% @* forces a line break.
|
| 518 |
|
|
\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
|
| 519 |
|
|
|
| 520 |
|
|
% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
|
| 521 |
|
|
\def\.{.\spacefactor=3000 }
|
| 522 |
|
|
|
| 523 |
|
|
% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
|
| 524 |
|
|
\def\!{!\spacefactor=3000 }
|
| 525 |
|
|
|
| 526 |
|
|
% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
|
| 527 |
|
|
\def\?{?\spacefactor=3000 }
|
| 528 |
|
|
|
| 529 |
|
|
% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
|
| 530 |
|
|
% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
|
| 531 |
|
|
% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
|
| 532 |
|
|
\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
|
| 533 |
|
|
|
| 534 |
|
|
% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
|
| 535 |
|
|
% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
|
| 536 |
|
|
% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
|
| 537 |
|
|
% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
|
| 538 |
|
|
% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
|
| 539 |
|
|
% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
|
| 540 |
|
|
% the text is small, which looks bad.
|
| 541 |
|
|
%
|
| 542 |
|
|
\def\group{\begingroup
|
| 543 |
|
|
\ifnum\catcode13=\active \else
|
| 544 |
|
|
\errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
|
| 545 |
|
|
\errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
|
| 546 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 547 |
|
|
%
|
| 548 |
|
|
% The \vtop we start below produces a box with normal height and large
|
| 549 |
|
|
% depth; thus, TeX puts \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the
|
| 550 |
|
|
% next line of text is done) \lineskip glue after it. (See p.82 of
|
| 551 |
|
|
% the TeXbook.) Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
|
| 552 |
|
|
% above. But it's pretty close.
|
| 553 |
|
|
\def\Egroup{%
|
| 554 |
|
|
\egroup % End the \vtop.
|
| 555 |
|
|
\endgroup % End the \group.
|
| 556 |
|
|
}%
|
| 557 |
|
|
%
|
| 558 |
|
|
\vtop\bgroup
|
| 559 |
|
|
% We have to put a strut on the last line in case the @group is in
|
| 560 |
|
|
% the midst of an example, rather than completely enclosing it.
|
| 561 |
|
|
% Otherwise, the interline space between the last line of the group
|
| 562 |
|
|
% and the first line afterwards is too small. But we can't put the
|
| 563 |
|
|
% strut in \Egroup, since there it would be on a line by itself.
|
| 564 |
|
|
% Hence this just inserts a strut at the beginning of each line.
|
| 565 |
|
|
\everypar = {\strut}%
|
| 566 |
|
|
%
|
| 567 |
|
|
% Since we have a strut on every line, we don't need any of TeX's
|
| 568 |
|
|
% normal interline spacing.
|
| 569 |
|
|
\offinterlineskip
|
| 570 |
|
|
%
|
| 571 |
|
|
% OK, but now we have to do something about blank
|
| 572 |
|
|
% lines in the input in @example-like environments, which normally
|
| 573 |
|
|
% just turn into \lisppar, which will insert no space now that we've
|
| 574 |
|
|
% turned off the interline space. Simplest is to make them be an
|
| 575 |
|
|
% empty paragraph.
|
| 576 |
|
|
\ifx\par\lisppar
|
| 577 |
|
|
\edef\par{\leavevmode \par}%
|
| 578 |
|
|
%
|
| 579 |
|
|
% Reset ^^M's definition to new definition of \par.
|
| 580 |
|
|
\obeylines
|
| 581 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 582 |
|
|
%
|
| 583 |
|
|
% Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
|
| 584 |
|
|
% @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
|
| 585 |
|
|
% end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
|
| 586 |
|
|
% the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
|
| 587 |
|
|
% should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
|
| 588 |
|
|
% manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
|
| 589 |
|
|
\comment
|
| 590 |
|
|
}
|
| 591 |
|
|
%
|
| 592 |
|
|
% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
|
| 593 |
|
|
% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
|
| 594 |
|
|
%
|
| 595 |
|
|
\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
|
| 596 |
|
|
group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
|
| 597 |
|
|
where each line of input produces a line of output.}
|
| 598 |
|
|
|
| 599 |
|
|
% @need space-in-mils
|
| 600 |
|
|
% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
|
| 601 |
|
|
|
| 602 |
|
|
\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
|
| 603 |
|
|
|
| 604 |
|
|
\def\need{\parsearg\needx}
|
| 605 |
|
|
|
| 606 |
|
|
% Old definition--didn't work.
|
| 607 |
|
|
%\def\needx #1{\par %
|
| 608 |
|
|
%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
|
| 609 |
|
|
%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
|
| 610 |
|
|
%{\baselineskip=0pt%
|
| 611 |
|
|
%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
|
| 612 |
|
|
%\prevdepth=-1000pt
|
| 613 |
|
|
%}}
|
| 614 |
|
|
|
| 615 |
|
|
\def\needx#1{%
|
| 616 |
|
|
% Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
|
| 617 |
|
|
% paragraph.
|
| 618 |
|
|
\par
|
| 619 |
|
|
%
|
| 620 |
|
|
% If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
|
| 621 |
|
|
\dimen0 = #1\mil
|
| 622 |
|
|
\dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
|
| 623 |
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
|
| 624 |
|
|
\ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
|
| 625 |
|
|
%
|
| 626 |
|
|
% Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
|
| 627 |
|
|
% normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
|
| 628 |
|
|
% And a page break here is fine.
|
| 629 |
|
|
\vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
|
| 630 |
|
|
%
|
| 631 |
|
|
% TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
|
| 632 |
|
|
% main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
|
| 633 |
|
|
% empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
|
| 634 |
|
|
% page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
|
| 635 |
|
|
% page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
|
| 636 |
|
|
%
|
| 637 |
|
|
% There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
|
| 638 |
|
|
% page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
|
| 639 |
|
|
% sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
|
| 640 |
|
|
% almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
|
| 641 |
|
|
% good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
|
| 642 |
|
|
% example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
|
| 643 |
|
|
% document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
|
| 644 |
|
|
\penalty9999
|
| 645 |
|
|
%
|
| 646 |
|
|
% Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
|
| 647 |
|
|
\kern -#1\mil
|
| 648 |
|
|
%
|
| 649 |
|
|
% Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
|
| 650 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 651 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 652 |
|
|
}
|
| 653 |
|
|
|
| 654 |
|
|
% @br forces paragraph break
|
| 655 |
|
|
|
| 656 |
|
|
\let\br = \par
|
| 657 |
|
|
|
| 658 |
|
|
% @dots{} output an ellipsis using the current font.
|
| 659 |
|
|
% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in a typewriter
|
| 660 |
|
|
% font as three actual period characters.
|
| 661 |
|
|
%
|
| 662 |
|
|
\def\dots{%
|
| 663 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 664 |
|
|
\hbox to 1.5em{%
|
| 665 |
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
| 666 |
|
|
.\hss.\hss.%
|
| 667 |
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
| 668 |
|
|
}%
|
| 669 |
|
|
}
|
| 670 |
|
|
|
| 671 |
|
|
% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
|
| 672 |
|
|
%
|
| 673 |
|
|
\def\enddots{%
|
| 674 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 675 |
|
|
\hbox to 2em{%
|
| 676 |
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.25fil minus 0.25fil
|
| 677 |
|
|
.\hss.\hss.\hss.%
|
| 678 |
|
|
\hskip 0pt plus 0.5fil minus 0.5fil
|
| 679 |
|
|
}%
|
| 680 |
|
|
\spacefactor=3000
|
| 681 |
|
|
}
|
| 682 |
|
|
|
| 683 |
|
|
|
| 684 |
|
|
% @page forces the start of a new page
|
| 685 |
|
|
%
|
| 686 |
|
|
\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
| 687 |
|
|
|
| 688 |
|
|
% @exdent text....
|
| 689 |
|
|
% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
|
| 690 |
|
|
|
| 691 |
|
|
% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
|
| 692 |
|
|
% That's how much \exdent should take out.
|
| 693 |
|
|
\newskip\exdentamount
|
| 694 |
|
|
|
| 695 |
|
|
% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
|
| 696 |
|
|
\def\exdent{\parsearg\exdentyyy}
|
| 697 |
|
|
\def\exdentyyy #1{{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}}
|
| 698 |
|
|
|
| 699 |
|
|
% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
|
| 700 |
|
|
\def\nofillexdent{\parsearg\nofillexdentyyy}
|
| 701 |
|
|
\def\nofillexdentyyy #1{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
|
| 702 |
|
|
\leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
|
| 703 |
|
|
|
| 704 |
|
|
% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
|
| 705 |
|
|
% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
|
| 706 |
|
|
% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
|
| 707 |
|
|
%
|
| 708 |
|
|
\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
|
| 709 |
|
|
\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
|
| 710 |
|
|
%
|
| 711 |
|
|
\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
|
| 712 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 713 |
|
|
\kern-\strutdepth
|
| 714 |
|
|
\vtop to \strutdepth{%
|
| 715 |
|
|
\baselineskip=\strutdepth
|
| 716 |
|
|
\vss
|
| 717 |
|
|
% if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
|
| 718 |
|
|
% make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
|
| 719 |
|
|
\ifx#1l%
|
| 720 |
|
|
\llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
|
| 721 |
|
|
\else
|
| 722 |
|
|
\rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 723 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 724 |
|
|
\null
|
| 725 |
|
|
}%
|
| 726 |
|
|
}}
|
| 727 |
|
|
\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
|
| 728 |
|
|
\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
|
| 729 |
|
|
%
|
| 730 |
|
|
% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
|
| 731 |
|
|
% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
|
| 732 |
|
|
% else use TEXT for both).
|
| 733 |
|
|
%
|
| 734 |
|
|
\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
|
| 735 |
|
|
\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
|
| 736 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 737 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| 738 |
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
|
| 739 |
|
|
\def\righttext{#2}%
|
| 740 |
|
|
\else
|
| 741 |
|
|
\def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
|
| 742 |
|
|
\def\righttext{#1}%
|
| 743 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 744 |
|
|
%
|
| 745 |
|
|
\ifodd\pageno
|
| 746 |
|
|
\def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
|
| 747 |
|
|
\else
|
| 748 |
|
|
\def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
|
| 749 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 750 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 751 |
|
|
}
|
| 752 |
|
|
|
| 753 |
|
|
% @include file insert text of that file as input.
|
| 754 |
|
|
% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
|
| 755 |
|
|
\def\include{\begingroup
|
| 756 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=12
|
| 757 |
|
|
\catcode`~=12
|
| 758 |
|
|
\catcode`^=12
|
| 759 |
|
|
\catcode`_=12
|
| 760 |
|
|
\catcode`|=12
|
| 761 |
|
|
\catcode`<=12
|
| 762 |
|
|
\catcode`>=12
|
| 763 |
|
|
\catcode`+=12
|
| 764 |
|
|
\parsearg\includezzz}
|
| 765 |
|
|
% Restore active chars for included file.
|
| 766 |
|
|
\def\includezzz#1{\endgroup\begingroup
|
| 767 |
|
|
% Read the included file in a group so nested @include's work.
|
| 768 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
| 769 |
|
|
\input\thisfile
|
| 770 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 771 |
|
|
|
| 772 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{}
|
| 773 |
|
|
|
| 774 |
|
|
% @center line outputs that line, centered
|
| 775 |
|
|
|
| 776 |
|
|
\def\center{\parsearg\centerzzz}
|
| 777 |
|
|
\def\centerzzz #1{{\advance\hsize by -\leftskip
|
| 778 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
| 779 |
|
|
\centerline{#1}}}
|
| 780 |
|
|
|
| 781 |
|
|
% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
|
| 782 |
|
|
|
| 783 |
|
|
\def\sp{\parsearg\spxxx}
|
| 784 |
|
|
\def\spxxx #1{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
|
| 785 |
|
|
|
| 786 |
|
|
% @comment ...line which is ignored...
|
| 787 |
|
|
% @c is the same as @comment
|
| 788 |
|
|
% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
|
| 789 |
|
|
|
| 790 |
|
|
\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
|
| 791 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
|
| 792 |
|
|
\commentxxx}
|
| 793 |
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
|
| 794 |
|
|
|
| 795 |
|
|
\let\c=\comment
|
| 796 |
|
|
|
| 797 |
|
|
% @paragraphindent NCHARS
|
| 798 |
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
|
| 799 |
|
|
% We cannot implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
|
| 800 |
|
|
%
|
| 801 |
|
|
\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
|
| 802 |
|
|
\def\noneword{none}
|
| 803 |
|
|
%
|
| 804 |
|
|
\def\paragraphindent{\parsearg\doparagraphindent}
|
| 805 |
|
|
\def\doparagraphindent#1{%
|
| 806 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 807 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
| 808 |
|
|
\else
|
| 809 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
| 810 |
|
|
\defaultparindent = 0pt
|
| 811 |
|
|
\else
|
| 812 |
|
|
\defaultparindent = #1em
|
| 813 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 814 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 815 |
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
| 816 |
|
|
}
|
| 817 |
|
|
|
| 818 |
|
|
% @exampleindent NCHARS
|
| 819 |
|
|
% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
|
| 820 |
|
|
% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
|
| 821 |
|
|
% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
|
| 822 |
|
|
\def\exampleindent{\parsearg\doexampleindent}
|
| 823 |
|
|
\def\doexampleindent#1{%
|
| 824 |
|
|
\def\temp{#1}%
|
| 825 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\asisword
|
| 826 |
|
|
\else
|
| 827 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\noneword
|
| 828 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0pt
|
| 829 |
|
|
\else
|
| 830 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = #1em
|
| 831 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 832 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 833 |
|
|
}
|
| 834 |
|
|
|
| 835 |
|
|
% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
|
| 836 |
|
|
%
|
| 837 |
|
|
\def\asis#1{#1}
|
| 838 |
|
|
|
| 839 |
|
|
% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
|
| 840 |
|
|
% We don't use $'s directly in the definition of \math because we need
|
| 841 |
|
|
% to set catcodes according to plain TeX first, to allow for subscripts,
|
| 842 |
|
|
% superscripts, special math chars, etc.
|
| 843 |
|
|
%
|
| 844 |
|
|
% @math does not do math typesetting in section titles, index
|
| 845 |
|
|
% entries, and other such contexts where the catcodes are set before
|
| 846 |
|
|
% @math gets a chance to work. This could perhaps be fixed, but for now
|
| 847 |
|
|
% at least we can have real math in the main text, where it's needed most.
|
| 848 |
|
|
%
|
| 849 |
|
|
\let\implicitmath = $%$ font-lock fix
|
| 850 |
|
|
%
|
| 851 |
|
|
% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
|
| 852 |
|
|
% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
|
| 853 |
|
|
% _ within @math be active (mathcode "8000), and distinguish by seeing
|
| 854 |
|
|
% if the current family is \slfam, which is what @var uses.
|
| 855 |
|
|
%
|
| 856 |
|
|
{\catcode95 = \active % 95 = _
|
| 857 |
|
|
\gdef\mathunderscore{%
|
| 858 |
|
|
\catcode95=\active
|
| 859 |
|
|
\def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
|
| 860 |
|
|
}}
|
| 861 |
|
|
%
|
| 862 |
|
|
% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
|
| 863 |
|
|
% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
|
| 864 |
|
|
% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
|
| 865 |
|
|
% otherwise define @\.
|
| 866 |
|
|
%
|
| 867 |
|
|
% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
|
| 868 |
|
|
\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
|
| 869 |
|
|
%
|
| 870 |
|
|
\def\math{%
|
| 871 |
|
|
\tex
|
| 872 |
|
|
\mathcode`\_="8000 \mathunderscore
|
| 873 |
|
|
\let\\ = \mathbackslash
|
| 874 |
|
|
\implicitmath\finishmath}
|
| 875 |
|
|
\def\finishmath#1{#1\implicitmath\Etex}
|
| 876 |
|
|
|
| 877 |
|
|
% @bullet and @minus need the same treatment as @math, just above.
|
| 878 |
|
|
\def\bullet{\implicitmath\ptexbullet\implicitmath}
|
| 879 |
|
|
\def\minus{\implicitmath-\implicitmath}
|
| 880 |
|
|
|
| 881 |
|
|
% @refill is a no-op.
|
| 882 |
|
|
\let\refill=\relax
|
| 883 |
|
|
|
| 884 |
|
|
% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
|
| 885 |
|
|
% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
|
| 886 |
|
|
% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
|
| 887 |
|
|
%
|
| 888 |
|
|
\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
|
| 889 |
|
|
\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
|
| 890 |
|
|
|
| 891 |
|
|
% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
|
| 892 |
|
|
% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
|
| 893 |
|
|
% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
|
| 894 |
|
|
\def\setfilename{%
|
| 895 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 896 |
|
|
\readauxfile
|
| 897 |
|
|
\fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
|
| 898 |
|
|
\openindices
|
| 899 |
|
|
\fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
|
| 900 |
|
|
\global\let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
|
| 901 |
|
|
%
|
| 902 |
|
|
% If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
|
| 903 |
|
|
% Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
|
| 904 |
|
|
% Just to be on the safe side, close the input stream before the \input.
|
| 905 |
|
|
\openin 1 texinfo.cnf
|
| 906 |
|
|
\ifeof1 \let\temp=\relax \else \def\temp{\input texinfo.cnf }\fi
|
| 907 |
|
|
\closein1
|
| 908 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 909 |
|
|
%
|
| 910 |
|
|
\comment % Ignore the actual filename.
|
| 911 |
|
|
}
|
| 912 |
|
|
|
| 913 |
|
|
% Called from \setfilename.
|
| 914 |
|
|
%
|
| 915 |
|
|
\def\openindices{%
|
| 916 |
|
|
\newindex{cp}%
|
| 917 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{fn}%
|
| 918 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{vr}%
|
| 919 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{tp}%
|
| 920 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{ky}%
|
| 921 |
|
|
\newcodeindex{pg}%
|
| 922 |
|
|
}
|
| 923 |
|
|
|
| 924 |
|
|
% @bye.
|
| 925 |
|
|
\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
|
| 926 |
|
|
|
| 927 |
|
|
|
| 928 |
|
|
\message{pdf,}
|
| 929 |
|
|
% adobe `portable' document format
|
| 930 |
|
|
\newcount\tempnum
|
| 931 |
|
|
\newcount\lnkcount
|
| 932 |
|
|
\newtoks\filename
|
| 933 |
|
|
\newcount\filenamelength
|
| 934 |
|
|
\newcount\pgn
|
| 935 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksA
|
| 936 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksB
|
| 937 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksC
|
| 938 |
|
|
\newtoks\toksD
|
| 939 |
|
|
\newbox\boxA
|
| 940 |
|
|
\newcount\countA
|
| 941 |
|
|
\newif\ifpdf
|
| 942 |
|
|
\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
|
| 943 |
|
|
|
| 944 |
|
|
\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
|
| 945 |
|
|
\pdffalse
|
| 946 |
|
|
\let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
|
| 947 |
|
|
\let\pdfurl = \gobble
|
| 948 |
|
|
\let\endlink = \relax
|
| 949 |
|
|
\let\linkcolor = \relax
|
| 950 |
|
|
\let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
|
| 951 |
|
|
\else
|
| 952 |
|
|
\pdftrue
|
| 953 |
|
|
\pdfoutput = 1
|
| 954 |
|
|
\input pdfcolor
|
| 955 |
|
|
\def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
|
| 956 |
|
|
\def\imagewidth{#2}%
|
| 957 |
|
|
\def\imageheight{#3}%
|
| 958 |
|
|
% without \immediate, pdftex seg faults when the same image is
|
| 959 |
|
|
% included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
|
| 960 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
| 961 |
|
|
\immediate\pdfimage
|
| 962 |
|
|
\else
|
| 963 |
|
|
\immediate\pdfximage
|
| 964 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 965 |
|
|
\ifx\empty\imagewidth\else width \imagewidth \fi
|
| 966 |
|
|
\ifx\empty\imageheight\else height \imageheight \fi
|
| 967 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion<13
|
| 968 |
|
|
#1.pdf%
|
| 969 |
|
|
\else
|
| 970 |
|
|
{#1.pdf}%
|
| 971 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 972 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
|
| 973 |
|
|
\pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
|
| 974 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 975 |
|
|
\def\pdfmkdest#1{{\normalturnoffactive \pdfdest name{#1} xyz}}
|
| 976 |
|
|
\def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
|
| 977 |
|
|
\let\linkcolor = \Blue % was Cyan, but that seems light?
|
| 978 |
|
|
\def\endlink{\Black\pdfendlink}
|
| 979 |
|
|
% Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
|
| 980 |
|
|
% come from Petr Olsak
|
| 981 |
|
|
\def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
|
| 982 |
|
|
\else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
|
| 983 |
|
|
\def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
|
| 984 |
|
|
\advance\tempnum by1
|
| 985 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
|
| 986 |
|
|
\def\pdfmakeoutlines{{%
|
| 987 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
| 988 |
|
|
\ifeof 1\else\begingroup
|
| 989 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 990 |
|
|
\indexnofonts
|
| 991 |
|
|
\def\tt{}
|
| 992 |
|
|
\let\_ = \normalunderscore
|
| 993 |
|
|
% Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
|
| 994 |
|
|
\edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
|
| 995 |
|
|
\edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
|
| 996 |
|
|
%
|
| 997 |
|
|
\def\chapentry ##1##2##3{}
|
| 998 |
|
|
\let\appendixentry = \chapentry
|
| 999 |
|
|
\def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{}
|
| 1000 |
|
|
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
|
| 1001 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{\advancenumber{chap##2}}
|
| 1002 |
|
|
\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
|
| 1003 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{\advancenumber{sec##2.##3}}
|
| 1004 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
|
| 1005 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{\advancenumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}}
|
| 1006 |
|
|
\input \jobname.toc
|
| 1007 |
|
|
\def\chapentry ##1##2##3{%
|
| 1008 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}count-\expnumber{chap##2}{##1}}
|
| 1009 |
|
|
\let\appendixentry = \chapentry
|
| 1010 |
|
|
\def\unnumbchapentry ##1##2{%
|
| 1011 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##2}}{##1}}
|
| 1012 |
|
|
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1013 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}count-\expnumber{sec##2.##3}{##1}}
|
| 1014 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{%
|
| 1015 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##3}}{##1}}
|
| 1016 |
|
|
\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
|
| 1017 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}count-\expnumber{subsec##2.##3.##4}{##1}}
|
| 1018 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{%
|
| 1019 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##4}}{##1}}
|
| 1020 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{%
|
| 1021 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##6}}{##1}}
|
| 1022 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{%
|
| 1023 |
|
|
\pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{##5}}{##1}}
|
| 1024 |
|
|
\input \jobname.toc
|
| 1025 |
|
|
\endgroup\fi
|
| 1026 |
|
|
}}
|
| 1027 |
|
|
\def\makelinks #1,{%
|
| 1028 |
|
|
\def\params{#1}\def\E{END}%
|
| 1029 |
|
|
\ifx\params\E
|
| 1030 |
|
|
\let\nextmakelinks=\relax
|
| 1031 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1032 |
|
|
\let\nextmakelinks=\makelinks
|
| 1033 |
|
|
\ifnum\lnkcount>0,\fi
|
| 1034 |
|
|
\picknum{#1}%
|
| 1035 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}
|
| 1036 |
|
|
goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\the\pgn}}%
|
| 1037 |
|
|
\linkcolor #1%
|
| 1038 |
|
|
\advance\lnkcount by 1%
|
| 1039 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 1040 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1041 |
|
|
\nextmakelinks
|
| 1042 |
|
|
}
|
| 1043 |
|
|
\def\picknum#1{\expandafter\pn#1}
|
| 1044 |
|
|
\def\pn#1{%
|
| 1045 |
|
|
\def\p{#1}%
|
| 1046 |
|
|
\ifx\p\lbrace
|
| 1047 |
|
|
\let\nextpn=\ppn
|
| 1048 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1049 |
|
|
\let\nextpn=\ppnn
|
| 1050 |
|
|
\def\first{#1}
|
| 1051 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1052 |
|
|
\nextpn
|
| 1053 |
|
|
}
|
| 1054 |
|
|
\def\ppn#1{\pgn=#1\gobble}
|
| 1055 |
|
|
\def\ppnn{\pgn=\first}
|
| 1056 |
|
|
\def\pdfmklnk#1{\lnkcount=0\makelinks #1,END,}
|
| 1057 |
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
| 1058 |
|
|
\def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
|
| 1059 |
|
|
\ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
|
| 1060 |
|
|
\else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
|
| 1061 |
|
|
\ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
|
| 1062 |
|
|
\advance\filenamelength by 1
|
| 1063 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1064 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1065 |
|
|
\nextsp}
|
| 1066 |
|
|
\def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
|
| 1067 |
|
|
\ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
|
| 1068 |
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfannotlink
|
| 1069 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1070 |
|
|
\let \startlink \pdfstartlink
|
| 1071 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1072 |
|
|
\def\pdfurl#1{%
|
| 1073 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1074 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive\def\@{@}%
|
| 1075 |
|
|
\let\value=\expandablevalue
|
| 1076 |
|
|
\leavevmode\Red
|
| 1077 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| 1078 |
|
|
user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
|
| 1079 |
|
|
% #1
|
| 1080 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 1081 |
|
|
\def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
|
| 1082 |
|
|
\def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
|
| 1083 |
|
|
\def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
|
| 1084 |
|
|
\def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
|
| 1085 |
|
|
\def\maketoks{%
|
| 1086 |
|
|
\expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|
|
| 1087 |
|
|
\ifx\first0\adn0
|
| 1088 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
|
| 1089 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
|
| 1090 |
|
|
\else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
|
| 1091 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1092 |
|
|
\ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
|
| 1093 |
|
|
\ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
|
| 1094 |
|
|
\let\next=\maketoks
|
| 1095 |
|
|
\addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
|
| 1096 |
|
|
\ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
|
| 1097 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1098 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| 1099 |
|
|
\next}
|
| 1100 |
|
|
\def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
|
| 1101 |
|
|
{\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
|
| 1102 |
|
|
\def\pdflink#1{%
|
| 1103 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
|
| 1104 |
|
|
\linkcolor #1\endlink}
|
| 1105 |
|
|
\def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
|
| 1106 |
|
|
\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
|
| 1107 |
|
|
|
| 1108 |
|
|
|
| 1109 |
|
|
\message{fonts,}
|
| 1110 |
|
|
% Font-change commands.
|
| 1111 |
|
|
|
| 1112 |
|
|
% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
|
| 1113 |
|
|
% So we set up a \sf analogous to plain's \rm, etc.
|
| 1114 |
|
|
\newfam\sffam
|
| 1115 |
|
|
\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \tensf}
|
| 1116 |
|
|
\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
|
| 1117 |
|
|
|
| 1118 |
|
|
% We don't need math for this one.
|
| 1119 |
|
|
\def\ttsl{\tenttsl}
|
| 1120 |
|
|
|
| 1121 |
|
|
% Default leading.
|
| 1122 |
|
|
\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
|
| 1123 |
|
|
|
| 1124 |
|
|
% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
|
| 1125 |
|
|
% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
|
| 1126 |
|
|
% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
|
| 1127 |
|
|
%
|
| 1128 |
|
|
\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
|
| 1129 |
|
|
\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
|
| 1130 |
|
|
\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
|
| 1131 |
|
|
%
|
| 1132 |
|
|
\def\setleading#1{%
|
| 1133 |
|
|
\normalbaselineskip = #1\relax
|
| 1134 |
|
|
\normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
|
| 1135 |
|
|
\normalbaselines
|
| 1136 |
|
|
\setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
|
| 1137 |
|
|
\vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
|
| 1138 |
|
|
depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
|
| 1139 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1140 |
|
|
}
|
| 1141 |
|
|
|
| 1142 |
|
|
% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
|
| 1143 |
|
|
% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
|
| 1144 |
|
|
% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor
|
| 1145 |
|
|
\def\setfont#1#2#3#4{\font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4}
|
| 1146 |
|
|
|
| 1147 |
|
|
% Use cm as the default font prefix.
|
| 1148 |
|
|
% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
|
| 1149 |
|
|
% before you read in texinfo.tex.
|
| 1150 |
|
|
\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
|
| 1151 |
|
|
\def\fontprefix{cm}
|
| 1152 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1153 |
|
|
% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
|
| 1154 |
|
|
\def\rmshape{r}
|
| 1155 |
|
|
\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
|
| 1156 |
|
|
\def\bfshape{b}
|
| 1157 |
|
|
\def\bxshape{bx}
|
| 1158 |
|
|
\def\ttshape{tt}
|
| 1159 |
|
|
\def\ttbshape{tt}
|
| 1160 |
|
|
\def\ttslshape{sltt}
|
| 1161 |
|
|
\def\itshape{ti}
|
| 1162 |
|
|
\def\itbshape{bxti}
|
| 1163 |
|
|
\def\slshape{sl}
|
| 1164 |
|
|
\def\slbshape{bxsl}
|
| 1165 |
|
|
\def\sfshape{ss}
|
| 1166 |
|
|
\def\sfbshape{ss}
|
| 1167 |
|
|
\def\scshape{csc}
|
| 1168 |
|
|
\def\scbshape{csc}
|
| 1169 |
|
|
|
| 1170 |
|
|
\newcount\mainmagstep
|
| 1171 |
|
|
\ifx\bigger\relax
|
| 1172 |
|
|
% not really supported.
|
| 1173 |
|
|
\let\mainmagstep=\magstep1
|
| 1174 |
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
| 1175 |
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{12}{1000}
|
| 1176 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1177 |
|
|
\mainmagstep=\magstephalf
|
| 1178 |
|
|
\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1179 |
|
|
\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1180 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1181 |
|
|
% Instead of cmb10, you many want to use cmbx10.
|
| 1182 |
|
|
% cmbx10 is a prettier font on its own, but cmb10
|
| 1183 |
|
|
% looks better when embedded in a line with cmr10.
|
| 1184 |
|
|
\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1185 |
|
|
\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1186 |
|
|
\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1187 |
|
|
\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1188 |
|
|
\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1189 |
|
|
\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}
|
| 1190 |
|
|
\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| 1191 |
|
|
\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
|
| 1192 |
|
|
|
| 1193 |
|
|
% A few fonts for @defun, etc.
|
| 1194 |
|
|
\setfont\defbf\bxshape{10}{\magstep1} %was 1314
|
| 1195 |
|
|
\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
| 1196 |
|
|
\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \bf}
|
| 1197 |
|
|
|
| 1198 |
|
|
% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
|
| 1199 |
|
|
\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}
|
| 1200 |
|
|
\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}
|
| 1201 |
|
|
\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}
|
| 1202 |
|
|
\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}
|
| 1203 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}
|
| 1204 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}
|
| 1205 |
|
|
\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}
|
| 1206 |
|
|
\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}
|
| 1207 |
|
|
\font\smalli=cmmi9
|
| 1208 |
|
|
\font\smallsy=cmsy9
|
| 1209 |
|
|
|
| 1210 |
|
|
% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
|
| 1211 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
| 1212 |
|
|
\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}
|
| 1213 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}
|
| 1214 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}
|
| 1215 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}
|
| 1216 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}
|
| 1217 |
|
|
\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}
|
| 1218 |
|
|
\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}
|
| 1219 |
|
|
\font\smalleri=cmmi8
|
| 1220 |
|
|
\font\smallersy=cmsy8
|
| 1221 |
|
|
|
| 1222 |
|
|
% Fonts for title page:
|
| 1223 |
|
|
\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
| 1224 |
|
|
\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
| 1225 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
| 1226 |
|
|
\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}
|
| 1227 |
|
|
\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
| 1228 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}
|
| 1229 |
|
|
\let\titlebf=\titlerm
|
| 1230 |
|
|
\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}
|
| 1231 |
|
|
\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
|
| 1232 |
|
|
\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
|
| 1233 |
|
|
\def\authorrm{\secrm}
|
| 1234 |
|
|
|
| 1235 |
|
|
% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
|
| 1236 |
|
|
\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
| 1237 |
|
|
\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
| 1238 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
| 1239 |
|
|
\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}
|
| 1240 |
|
|
\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
| 1241 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}
|
| 1242 |
|
|
\let\chapbf=\chaprm
|
| 1243 |
|
|
\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}
|
| 1244 |
|
|
\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
|
| 1245 |
|
|
\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
|
| 1246 |
|
|
|
| 1247 |
|
|
% Section fonts (14.4pt).
|
| 1248 |
|
|
\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
| 1249 |
|
|
\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
| 1250 |
|
|
\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
| 1251 |
|
|
\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
| 1252 |
|
|
\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
| 1253 |
|
|
\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}
|
| 1254 |
|
|
\let\secbf\secrm
|
| 1255 |
|
|
\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}
|
| 1256 |
|
|
\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
|
| 1257 |
|
|
\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
|
| 1258 |
|
|
|
| 1259 |
|
|
% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
|
| 1260 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
| 1261 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}
|
| 1262 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}
|
| 1263 |
|
|
\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
| 1264 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}
|
| 1265 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}
|
| 1266 |
|
|
\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
|
| 1267 |
|
|
\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}
|
| 1268 |
|
|
\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
|
| 1269 |
|
|
\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
|
| 1270 |
|
|
% The smallcaps and symbol fonts should actually be scaled \magstep1.5,
|
| 1271 |
|
|
% but that is not a standard magnification.
|
| 1272 |
|
|
|
| 1273 |
|
|
% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
|
| 1274 |
|
|
% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
|
| 1275 |
|
|
% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
|
| 1276 |
|
|
% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
|
| 1277 |
|
|
% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
|
| 1278 |
|
|
%
|
| 1279 |
|
|
\def\resetmathfonts{%
|
| 1280 |
|
|
\textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
|
| 1281 |
|
|
\textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
|
| 1282 |
|
|
\textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
|
| 1283 |
|
|
}
|
| 1284 |
|
|
|
| 1285 |
|
|
% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
|
| 1286 |
|
|
% of just \STYLE. We do this so that font changes will continue to work
|
| 1287 |
|
|
% in math mode, where it is the current \fam that is relevant in most
|
| 1288 |
|
|
% cases, not the current font. Plain TeX does \def\bf{\fam=\bffam
|
| 1289 |
|
|
% \tenbf}, for example. By redefining \tenbf, we obviate the need to
|
| 1290 |
|
|
% redefine \bf itself.
|
| 1291 |
|
|
\def\textfonts{%
|
| 1292 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
|
| 1293 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
|
| 1294 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
|
| 1295 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
|
| 1296 |
|
|
\def\titlefonts{%
|
| 1297 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
|
| 1298 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
|
| 1299 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
|
| 1300 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
|
| 1301 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
|
| 1302 |
|
|
\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
|
| 1303 |
|
|
\def\chapfonts{%
|
| 1304 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
|
| 1305 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
|
| 1306 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
|
| 1307 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
|
| 1308 |
|
|
\def\secfonts{%
|
| 1309 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
|
| 1310 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
|
| 1311 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
|
| 1312 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
|
| 1313 |
|
|
\def\subsecfonts{%
|
| 1314 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
|
| 1315 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
|
| 1316 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
|
| 1317 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
|
| 1318 |
|
|
\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts % Maybe make sssec fonts scaled magstephalf?
|
| 1319 |
|
|
\def\smallfonts{%
|
| 1320 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
|
| 1321 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
|
| 1322 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
|
| 1323 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
|
| 1324 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
|
| 1325 |
|
|
\def\smallerfonts{%
|
| 1326 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
|
| 1327 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
|
| 1328 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
|
| 1329 |
|
|
\let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
|
| 1330 |
|
|
\resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
|
| 1331 |
|
|
\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallerfonts
|
| 1332 |
|
|
|
| 1333 |
|
|
% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
|
| 1334 |
|
|
%
|
| 1335 |
|
|
\textfonts
|
| 1336 |
|
|
|
| 1337 |
|
|
% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
|
| 1338 |
|
|
\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
|
| 1339 |
|
|
\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
|
| 1340 |
|
|
|
| 1341 |
|
|
% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
|
| 1342 |
|
|
\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
|
| 1343 |
|
|
|
| 1344 |
|
|
% Fonts for short table of contents.
|
| 1345 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}
|
| 1346 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontbf\bxshape{12}{1000}
|
| 1347 |
|
|
\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}
|
| 1348 |
|
|
|
| 1349 |
|
|
%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
|
| 1350 |
|
|
%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
|
| 1351 |
|
|
|
| 1352 |
|
|
% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
|
| 1353 |
|
|
% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
|
| 1354 |
|
|
\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else\/\fi\fi\fi}
|
| 1355 |
|
|
\def\smartslanted#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| 1356 |
|
|
\def\smartitalic#1{{\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
|
| 1357 |
|
|
|
| 1358 |
|
|
\let\i=\smartitalic
|
| 1359 |
|
|
\let\var=\smartslanted
|
| 1360 |
|
|
\let\dfn=\smartslanted
|
| 1361 |
|
|
\let\emph=\smartitalic
|
| 1362 |
|
|
\let\cite=\smartslanted
|
| 1363 |
|
|
|
| 1364 |
|
|
\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
|
| 1365 |
|
|
\let\strong=\b
|
| 1366 |
|
|
|
| 1367 |
|
|
% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
|
| 1368 |
|
|
% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
|
| 1369 |
|
|
% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
|
| 1370 |
|
|
%
|
| 1371 |
|
|
\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
|
| 1372 |
|
|
\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
|
| 1373 |
|
|
|
| 1374 |
|
|
\def\t#1{%
|
| 1375 |
|
|
{\tt \rawbackslash \frenchspacing #1}%
|
| 1376 |
|
|
\null
|
| 1377 |
|
|
}
|
| 1378 |
|
|
\let\ttfont=\t
|
| 1379 |
|
|
\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
|
| 1380 |
|
|
\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}
|
| 1381 |
|
|
\font\keysy=cmsy9
|
| 1382 |
|
|
\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
|
| 1383 |
|
|
\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
|
| 1384 |
|
|
\vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
|
| 1385 |
|
|
\hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
|
| 1386 |
|
|
\kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
|
| 1387 |
|
|
\kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
|
| 1388 |
|
|
% The old definition, with no lozenge:
|
| 1389 |
|
|
%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
|
| 1390 |
|
|
\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
|
| 1391 |
|
|
|
| 1392 |
|
|
% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
|
| 1393 |
|
|
\let\file=\samp
|
| 1394 |
|
|
\let\option=\samp
|
| 1395 |
|
|
|
| 1396 |
|
|
% @code is a modification of @t,
|
| 1397 |
|
|
% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
|
| 1398 |
|
|
\def\tclose#1{%
|
| 1399 |
|
|
{%
|
| 1400 |
|
|
% Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
|
| 1401 |
|
|
\spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
|
| 1402 |
|
|
%
|
| 1403 |
|
|
% Switch to typewriter.
|
| 1404 |
|
|
\tt
|
| 1405 |
|
|
%
|
| 1406 |
|
|
% But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
|
| 1407 |
|
|
\def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
|
| 1408 |
|
|
%
|
| 1409 |
|
|
% Turn off hyphenation.
|
| 1410 |
|
|
\nohyphenation
|
| 1411 |
|
|
%
|
| 1412 |
|
|
\rawbackslash
|
| 1413 |
|
|
\frenchspacing
|
| 1414 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 1415 |
|
|
}%
|
| 1416 |
|
|
\null
|
| 1417 |
|
|
}
|
| 1418 |
|
|
|
| 1419 |
|
|
% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in \code.
|
| 1420 |
|
|
% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
|
| 1421 |
|
|
% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
|
| 1422 |
|
|
|
| 1423 |
|
|
% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
|
| 1424 |
|
|
% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
|
| 1425 |
|
|
% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
|
| 1426 |
|
|
% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
|
| 1427 |
|
|
% -- rms.
|
| 1428 |
|
|
{
|
| 1429 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active
|
| 1430 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
| 1431 |
|
|
%
|
| 1432 |
|
|
\global\def\code{\begingroup
|
| 1433 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=\active \let-\codedash
|
| 1434 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active \let_\codeunder
|
| 1435 |
|
|
\codex
|
| 1436 |
|
|
}
|
| 1437 |
|
|
%
|
| 1438 |
|
|
% If we end up with any active - characters when handling the index,
|
| 1439 |
|
|
% just treat them as a normal -.
|
| 1440 |
|
|
\global\def\indexbreaks{\catcode`\-=\active \let-\realdash}
|
| 1441 |
|
|
}
|
| 1442 |
|
|
|
| 1443 |
|
|
\def\realdash{-}
|
| 1444 |
|
|
\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
|
| 1445 |
|
|
\def\codeunder{%
|
| 1446 |
|
|
% this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
|
| 1447 |
|
|
% is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
|
| 1448 |
|
|
% will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
|
| 1449 |
|
|
% (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
|
| 1450 |
|
|
\ifusingtt{\ifmmode
|
| 1451 |
|
|
\mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
|
| 1452 |
|
|
\else\normalunderscore \fi
|
| 1453 |
|
|
\discretionary{}{}{}}%
|
| 1454 |
|
|
{\_}%
|
| 1455 |
|
|
}
|
| 1456 |
|
|
\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
|
| 1457 |
|
|
|
| 1458 |
|
|
% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
|
| 1459 |
|
|
% then @kbd has no effect.
|
| 1460 |
|
|
|
| 1461 |
|
|
% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
|
| 1462 |
|
|
% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
|
| 1463 |
|
|
% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
|
| 1464 |
|
|
\def\kbdinputstyle{\parsearg\kbdinputstylexxx}
|
| 1465 |
|
|
\def\kbdinputstylexxx#1{%
|
| 1466 |
|
|
\def\arg{#1}%
|
| 1467 |
|
|
\ifx\arg\worddistinct
|
| 1468 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
|
| 1469 |
|
|
\else\ifx\arg\wordexample
|
| 1470 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
| 1471 |
|
|
\else\ifx\arg\wordcode
|
| 1472 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
|
| 1473 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi
|
| 1474 |
|
|
}
|
| 1475 |
|
|
\def\worddistinct{distinct}
|
| 1476 |
|
|
\def\wordexample{example}
|
| 1477 |
|
|
\def\wordcode{code}
|
| 1478 |
|
|
|
| 1479 |
|
|
% Default is kbdinputdistinct. (Too much of a hassle to call the macro,
|
| 1480 |
|
|
% the catcodes are wrong for parsearg to work.)
|
| 1481 |
|
|
\gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}
|
| 1482 |
|
|
|
| 1483 |
|
|
\def\xkey{\key}
|
| 1484 |
|
|
\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
|
| 1485 |
|
|
\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
|
| 1486 |
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
|
| 1487 |
|
|
\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
|
| 1488 |
|
|
|
| 1489 |
|
|
% For @url, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
|
| 1490 |
|
|
\let\url=\code
|
| 1491 |
|
|
\let\env=\code
|
| 1492 |
|
|
\let\command=\code
|
| 1493 |
|
|
|
| 1494 |
|
|
% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
|
| 1495 |
|
|
% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
|
| 1496 |
|
|
% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
|
| 1497 |
|
|
% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
|
| 1498 |
|
|
% a hypertex \special here.
|
| 1499 |
|
|
%
|
| 1500 |
|
|
\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
|
| 1501 |
|
|
\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
|
| 1502 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 1503 |
|
|
\pdfurl{#1}%
|
| 1504 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| 1505 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| 1506 |
|
|
\unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
|
| 1507 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1508 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 1509 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
|
| 1510 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 1511 |
|
|
\unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
|
| 1512 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1513 |
|
|
\unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
|
| 1514 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1515 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1516 |
|
|
\code{#1}% only url given, so show it
|
| 1517 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1518 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1519 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 1520 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 1521 |
|
|
|
| 1522 |
|
|
% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
|
| 1523 |
|
|
% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
|
| 1524 |
|
|
%
|
| 1525 |
|
|
%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
|
| 1526 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 1527 |
|
|
\def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
|
| 1528 |
|
|
\def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
|
| 1529 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 1530 |
|
|
\pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
|
| 1531 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
|
| 1532 |
|
|
\ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
|
| 1533 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 1534 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 1535 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1536 |
|
|
\let\email=\uref
|
| 1537 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1538 |
|
|
|
| 1539 |
|
|
% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
|
| 1540 |
|
|
% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
|
| 1541 |
|
|
% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
|
| 1542 |
|
|
% this property, we can check that font parameter.
|
| 1543 |
|
|
%
|
| 1544 |
|
|
\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
|
| 1545 |
|
|
|
| 1546 |
|
|
% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
|
| 1547 |
|
|
% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
|
| 1548 |
|
|
%
|
| 1549 |
|
|
\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
|
| 1550 |
|
|
|
| 1551 |
|
|
\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
|
| 1552 |
|
|
|
| 1553 |
|
|
% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
|
| 1554 |
|
|
% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
|
| 1555 |
|
|
% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
|
| 1556 |
|
|
%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
|
| 1557 |
|
|
|
| 1558 |
|
|
% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
|
| 1559 |
|
|
\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
|
| 1560 |
|
|
\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
|
| 1561 |
|
|
\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
|
| 1562 |
|
|
|
| 1563 |
|
|
% @acronym downcases the argument and prints in smallcaps.
|
| 1564 |
|
|
\def\acronym#1{{\smallcaps \lowercase{#1}}}
|
| 1565 |
|
|
|
| 1566 |
|
|
% @pounds{} is a sterling sign.
|
| 1567 |
|
|
\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
|
| 1568 |
|
|
|
| 1569 |
|
|
|
| 1570 |
|
|
\message{page headings,}
|
| 1571 |
|
|
|
| 1572 |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
|
| 1573 |
|
|
\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
|
| 1574 |
|
|
|
| 1575 |
|
|
% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
|
| 1576 |
|
|
\newif\ifseenauthor
|
| 1577 |
|
|
\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
|
| 1578 |
|
|
|
| 1579 |
|
|
% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
|
| 1580 |
|
|
% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
|
| 1581 |
|
|
%
|
| 1582 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 1583 |
|
|
\let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
| 1584 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 1585 |
|
|
\let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
|
| 1586 |
|
|
|
| 1587 |
|
|
\def\shorttitlepage{\parsearg\shorttitlepagezzz}
|
| 1588 |
|
|
\def\shorttitlepagezzz #1{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
|
| 1589 |
|
|
\endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
|
| 1590 |
|
|
|
| 1591 |
|
|
\def\titlepage{\begingroup \parindent=0pt \textfonts
|
| 1592 |
|
|
\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
|
| 1593 |
|
|
\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}%
|
| 1594 |
|
|
%
|
| 1595 |
|
|
\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines}%
|
| 1596 |
|
|
%
|
| 1597 |
|
|
% Leave some space at the very top of the page.
|
| 1598 |
|
|
\vglue\titlepagetopglue
|
| 1599 |
|
|
%
|
| 1600 |
|
|
% Now you can print the title using @title.
|
| 1601 |
|
|
\def\title{\parsearg\titlezzz}%
|
| 1602 |
|
|
\def\titlezzz##1{\leftline{\titlefonts\rm ##1}
|
| 1603 |
|
|
% print a rule at the page bottom also.
|
| 1604 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagefalse
|
| 1605 |
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt}%
|
| 1606 |
|
|
% No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
|
| 1607 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
| 1608 |
|
|
%
|
| 1609 |
|
|
% Now you can put text using @subtitle.
|
| 1610 |
|
|
\def\subtitle{\parsearg\subtitlezzz}%
|
| 1611 |
|
|
\def\subtitlezzz##1{{\subtitlefont \rightline{##1}}}%
|
| 1612 |
|
|
%
|
| 1613 |
|
|
% @author should come last, but may come many times.
|
| 1614 |
|
|
\def\author{\parsearg\authorzzz}%
|
| 1615 |
|
|
\def\authorzzz##1{\ifseenauthor\else\vskip 0pt plus 1filll\seenauthortrue\fi
|
| 1616 |
|
|
{\authorfont \leftline{##1}}}%
|
| 1617 |
|
|
%
|
| 1618 |
|
|
% Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
|
| 1619 |
|
|
% at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
|
| 1620 |
|
|
\let\oldpage = \page
|
| 1621 |
|
|
\def\page{%
|
| 1622 |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
| 1623 |
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
| 1624 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1625 |
|
|
\oldpage
|
| 1626 |
|
|
\let\page = \oldpage
|
| 1627 |
|
|
\hbox{}}%
|
| 1628 |
|
|
% \def\page{\oldpage \hbox{}}
|
| 1629 |
|
|
}
|
| 1630 |
|
|
|
| 1631 |
|
|
\def\Etitlepage{%
|
| 1632 |
|
|
\iffinishedtitlepage\else
|
| 1633 |
|
|
\finishtitlepage
|
| 1634 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1635 |
|
|
% It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
|
| 1636 |
|
|
% because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
|
| 1637 |
|
|
% If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
|
| 1638 |
|
|
% after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
|
| 1639 |
|
|
\oldpage
|
| 1640 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 1641 |
|
|
%
|
| 1642 |
|
|
% Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
|
| 1643 |
|
|
% in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
|
| 1644 |
|
|
\HEADINGSon
|
| 1645 |
|
|
%
|
| 1646 |
|
|
% If they want short, they certainly want long too.
|
| 1647 |
|
|
\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 1648 |
|
|
\shortcontents
|
| 1649 |
|
|
\contents
|
| 1650 |
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
| 1651 |
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
| 1652 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1653 |
|
|
%
|
| 1654 |
|
|
\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
|
| 1655 |
|
|
\contents
|
| 1656 |
|
|
\global\let\contents = \relax
|
| 1657 |
|
|
\global\let\shortcontents = \relax
|
| 1658 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1659 |
|
|
}
|
| 1660 |
|
|
|
| 1661 |
|
|
\def\finishtitlepage{%
|
| 1662 |
|
|
\vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
|
| 1663 |
|
|
\vskip\titlepagebottomglue
|
| 1664 |
|
|
\finishedtitlepagetrue
|
| 1665 |
|
|
}
|
| 1666 |
|
|
|
| 1667 |
|
|
%%% Set up page headings and footings.
|
| 1668 |
|
|
|
| 1669 |
|
|
\let\thispage=\folio
|
| 1670 |
|
|
|
| 1671 |
|
|
\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
|
| 1672 |
|
|
\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
|
| 1673 |
|
|
\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
|
| 1674 |
|
|
\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
|
| 1675 |
|
|
|
| 1676 |
|
|
% Now make Tex use those variables
|
| 1677 |
|
|
\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
|
| 1678 |
|
|
\else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
|
| 1679 |
|
|
\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
|
| 1680 |
|
|
\else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
|
| 1681 |
|
|
\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
|
| 1682 |
|
|
|
| 1683 |
|
|
% Commands to set those variables.
|
| 1684 |
|
|
% For example, this is what @headings on does
|
| 1685 |
|
|
% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
|
| 1686 |
|
|
% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
|
| 1687 |
|
|
% @evenfooting @thisfile||
|
| 1688 |
|
|
% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
|
| 1689 |
|
|
|
| 1690 |
|
|
\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
|
| 1691 |
|
|
\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
|
| 1692 |
|
|
\def\everyheading{\parsearg\everyheadingxxx}
|
| 1693 |
|
|
|
| 1694 |
|
|
\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
|
| 1695 |
|
|
\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
|
| 1696 |
|
|
\def\everyfooting{\parsearg\everyfootingxxx}
|
| 1697 |
|
|
|
| 1698 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 %
|
| 1699 |
|
|
|
| 1700 |
|
|
\gdef\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
| 1701 |
|
|
\gdef\evenheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
| 1702 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| 1703 |
|
|
|
| 1704 |
|
|
\gdef\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
| 1705 |
|
|
\gdef\oddheadingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
| 1706 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| 1707 |
|
|
|
| 1708 |
|
|
\gdef\everyheadingxxx#1{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
|
| 1709 |
|
|
|
| 1710 |
|
|
\gdef\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
| 1711 |
|
|
\gdef\evenfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
| 1712 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
|
| 1713 |
|
|
|
| 1714 |
|
|
\gdef\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1@|@|@|@|\finish}
|
| 1715 |
|
|
\gdef\oddfootingyyy #1@|#2@|#3@|#4\finish{%
|
| 1716 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
|
| 1717 |
|
|
%
|
| 1718 |
|
|
% Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
|
| 1719 |
|
|
% @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
|
| 1720 |
|
|
\global\advance\pageheight by -\baselineskip
|
| 1721 |
|
|
\global\advance\vsize by -\baselineskip
|
| 1722 |
|
|
}
|
| 1723 |
|
|
|
| 1724 |
|
|
\gdef\everyfootingxxx#1{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
|
| 1725 |
|
|
%
|
| 1726 |
|
|
}% unbind the catcode of @.
|
| 1727 |
|
|
|
| 1728 |
|
|
% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
|
| 1729 |
|
|
% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
|
| 1730 |
|
|
% @headings off turns them off.
|
| 1731 |
|
|
% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
|
| 1732 |
|
|
% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
| 1733 |
|
|
% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
|
| 1734 |
|
|
% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
|
| 1735 |
|
|
% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
|
| 1736 |
|
|
% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
|
| 1737 |
|
|
|
| 1738 |
|
|
\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
|
| 1739 |
|
|
|
| 1740 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSoff{
|
| 1741 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1742 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
|
| 1743 |
|
|
\HEADINGSoff
|
| 1744 |
|
|
% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
|
| 1745 |
|
|
% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
|
| 1746 |
|
|
% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
|
| 1747 |
|
|
% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
|
| 1748 |
|
|
% edge of all pages.
|
| 1749 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdouble{
|
| 1750 |
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
| 1751 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1752 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1753 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
| 1754 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 1755 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| 1756 |
|
|
}
|
| 1757 |
|
|
\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 1758 |
|
|
|
| 1759 |
|
|
% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
|
| 1760 |
|
|
% page number on top right.
|
| 1761 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingle{
|
| 1762 |
|
|
\global\pageno=1
|
| 1763 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1764 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1765 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 1766 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 1767 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 1768 |
|
|
}
|
| 1769 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
|
| 1770 |
|
|
|
| 1771 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
|
| 1772 |
|
|
\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
|
| 1773 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
|
| 1774 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1775 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1776 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
|
| 1777 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 1778 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| 1779 |
|
|
}
|
| 1780 |
|
|
|
| 1781 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
|
| 1782 |
|
|
\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
|
| 1783 |
|
|
\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1784 |
|
|
\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
|
| 1785 |
|
|
\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 1786 |
|
|
\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
|
| 1787 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 1788 |
|
|
}
|
| 1789 |
|
|
|
| 1790 |
|
|
% Subroutines used in generating headings
|
| 1791 |
|
|
% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
|
| 1792 |
|
|
% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
|
| 1793 |
|
|
% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
|
| 1794 |
|
|
\ifx\today\undefined
|
| 1795 |
|
|
\def\today{%
|
| 1796 |
|
|
\number\day\space
|
| 1797 |
|
|
\ifcase\month
|
| 1798 |
|
|
\or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
|
| 1799 |
|
|
\or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
|
| 1800 |
|
|
\or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
|
| 1801 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1802 |
|
|
\space\number\year}
|
| 1803 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1804 |
|
|
|
| 1805 |
|
|
% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
|
| 1806 |
|
|
% It generates no output of its own.
|
| 1807 |
|
|
\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
|
| 1808 |
|
|
\def\settitle{\parsearg\settitlezzz}
|
| 1809 |
|
|
\def\settitlezzz #1{\gdef\thistitle{#1}}
|
| 1810 |
|
|
|
| 1811 |
|
|
|
| 1812 |
|
|
\message{tables,}
|
| 1813 |
|
|
% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x), @kitem(x), @xitem(x).
|
| 1814 |
|
|
|
| 1815 |
|
|
% default indentation of table text
|
| 1816 |
|
|
\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
|
| 1817 |
|
|
% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
|
| 1818 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
|
| 1819 |
|
|
% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
|
| 1820 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
|
| 1821 |
|
|
|
| 1822 |
|
|
% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
|
| 1823 |
|
|
\newdimen\itemmax
|
| 1824 |
|
|
|
| 1825 |
|
|
% Note @table, @vtable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
|
| 1826 |
|
|
% these defs.
|
| 1827 |
|
|
% They also define \itemindex
|
| 1828 |
|
|
% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
|
| 1829 |
|
|
|
| 1830 |
|
|
\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
|
| 1831 |
|
|
|
| 1832 |
|
|
\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
|
| 1833 |
|
|
|
| 1834 |
|
|
\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
| 1835 |
|
|
\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
|
| 1836 |
|
|
|
| 1837 |
|
|
\def\internalBxitem "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \smallbreak \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
| 1838 |
|
|
\def\internalBxitemx "#1"{\def\xitemsubtopix{#1} \itemxpar \parsearg\xitemzzz}
|
| 1839 |
|
|
|
| 1840 |
|
|
\def\internalBkitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
| 1841 |
|
|
\def\internalBkitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\kitemzzz}
|
| 1842 |
|
|
|
| 1843 |
|
|
\def\kitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \lastfunction}}%
|
| 1844 |
|
|
\itemzzz {#1}}
|
| 1845 |
|
|
|
| 1846 |
|
|
\def\xitemzzz #1{\dosubind {kw}{\code{#1}}{for {\bf \xitemsubtopic}}%
|
| 1847 |
|
|
\itemzzz {#1}}
|
| 1848 |
|
|
|
| 1849 |
|
|
\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
|
| 1850 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\rightskip
|
| 1851 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\tableindent
|
| 1852 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\itemfont{#1}}%
|
| 1853 |
|
|
\itemindex{#1}%
|
| 1854 |
|
|
\nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
|
| 1855 |
|
|
%
|
| 1856 |
|
|
% If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
|
| 1857 |
|
|
% by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
|
| 1858 |
|
|
% line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
|
| 1859 |
|
|
% command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
|
| 1860 |
|
|
% horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
|
| 1861 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
|
| 1862 |
|
|
%
|
| 1863 |
|
|
% Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
|
| 1864 |
|
|
% but leave it ragged-right.
|
| 1865 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 1866 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
|
| 1867 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\tableindent
|
| 1868 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
|
| 1869 |
|
|
\leavevmode\unhbox0\par
|
| 1870 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 1871 |
|
|
%
|
| 1872 |
|
|
% We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
|
| 1873 |
|
|
% \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
|
| 1874 |
|
|
\nobreak \vskip-\parskip
|
| 1875 |
|
|
%
|
| 1876 |
|
|
% Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. Unfortunately
|
| 1877 |
|
|
% we can't prevent a possible page break at the following
|
| 1878 |
|
|
% \baselineskip glue.
|
| 1879 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 1880 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 1881 |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
|
| 1882 |
|
|
\else
|
| 1883 |
|
|
% The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
|
| 1884 |
|
|
% following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
|
| 1885 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 1886 |
|
|
% Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
|
| 1887 |
|
|
% the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
|
| 1888 |
|
|
% eventually be printed.
|
| 1889 |
|
|
\nobreak\kern-\tableindent
|
| 1890 |
|
|
\dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
|
| 1891 |
|
|
\unhbox0
|
| 1892 |
|
|
\nobreak\kern\dimen0
|
| 1893 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 1894 |
|
|
\itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
|
| 1895 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 1896 |
|
|
}
|
| 1897 |
|
|
|
| 1898 |
|
|
\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a table}}
|
| 1899 |
|
|
\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a table}}
|
| 1900 |
|
|
\def\kitem{\errmessage{@kitem while not in a table}}
|
| 1901 |
|
|
\def\kitemx{\errmessage{@kitemx while not in a table}}
|
| 1902 |
|
|
\def\xitem{\errmessage{@xitem while not in a table}}
|
| 1903 |
|
|
\def\xitemx{\errmessage{@xitemx while not in a table}}
|
| 1904 |
|
|
|
| 1905 |
|
|
% Contains a kludge to get @end[description] to work.
|
| 1906 |
|
|
\def\description{\tablez{\dontindex}{1}{}{}{}{}}
|
| 1907 |
|
|
|
| 1908 |
|
|
% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
|
| 1909 |
|
|
\def\table{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\tablex}
|
| 1910 |
|
|
{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
| 1911 |
|
|
\gdef\tablex #1^^M{%
|
| 1912 |
|
|
\tabley\dontindex#1 \endtabley}}
|
| 1913 |
|
|
|
| 1914 |
|
|
\def\ftable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\ftablex}
|
| 1915 |
|
|
{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
| 1916 |
|
|
\gdef\ftablex #1^^M{%
|
| 1917 |
|
|
\tabley\fnitemindex#1 \endtabley
|
| 1918 |
|
|
\def\Eftable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
| 1919 |
|
|
\let\Etable=\relax}}
|
| 1920 |
|
|
|
| 1921 |
|
|
\def\vtable{\begingroup\inENV\obeylines\obeyspaces\vtablex}
|
| 1922 |
|
|
{\obeylines\obeyspaces%
|
| 1923 |
|
|
\gdef\vtablex #1^^M{%
|
| 1924 |
|
|
\tabley\vritemindex#1 \endtabley
|
| 1925 |
|
|
\def\Evtable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
| 1926 |
|
|
\let\Etable=\relax}}
|
| 1927 |
|
|
|
| 1928 |
|
|
\def\dontindex #1{}
|
| 1929 |
|
|
\def\fnitemindex #1{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}}%
|
| 1930 |
|
|
\def\vritemindex #1{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}}%
|
| 1931 |
|
|
|
| 1932 |
|
|
{\obeyspaces %
|
| 1933 |
|
|
\gdef\tabley#1#2 #3 #4 #5 #6 #7\endtabley{\endgroup%
|
| 1934 |
|
|
\tablez{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{#6}}}
|
| 1935 |
|
|
|
| 1936 |
|
|
\def\tablez #1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
| 1937 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak %
|
| 1938 |
|
|
\begingroup %
|
| 1939 |
|
|
\def\Edescription{\Etable}% Necessary kludge.
|
| 1940 |
|
|
\let\itemindex=#1%
|
| 1941 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \leftskip by #3\mil \fi %
|
| 1942 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#4>0 \tableindent=#4\mil \fi %
|
| 1943 |
|
|
\ifnum 0#5>0 \advance \rightskip by #5\mil \fi %
|
| 1944 |
|
|
\def\itemfont{#2}%
|
| 1945 |
|
|
\itemmax=\tableindent %
|
| 1946 |
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
| 1947 |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \tableindent %
|
| 1948 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\tableindent
|
| 1949 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
| 1950 |
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount
|
| 1951 |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
| 1952 |
|
|
\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
| 1953 |
|
|
\let\item = \internalBitem %
|
| 1954 |
|
|
\let\itemx = \internalBitemx %
|
| 1955 |
|
|
\let\kitem = \internalBkitem %
|
| 1956 |
|
|
\let\kitemx = \internalBkitemx %
|
| 1957 |
|
|
\let\xitem = \internalBxitem %
|
| 1958 |
|
|
\let\xitemx = \internalBxitemx %
|
| 1959 |
|
|
}
|
| 1960 |
|
|
|
| 1961 |
|
|
% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
|
| 1962 |
|
|
|
| 1963 |
|
|
\newcount \itemno
|
| 1964 |
|
|
|
| 1965 |
|
|
\def\itemize{\parsearg\itemizezzz}
|
| 1966 |
|
|
|
| 1967 |
|
|
\def\itemizezzz #1{%
|
| 1968 |
|
|
\begingroup % ended by the @end itemize
|
| 1969 |
|
|
\itemizey {#1}{\Eitemize}
|
| 1970 |
|
|
}
|
| 1971 |
|
|
|
| 1972 |
|
|
\def\itemizey #1#2{%
|
| 1973 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak %
|
| 1974 |
|
|
\itemmax=\itemindent %
|
| 1975 |
|
|
\advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin %
|
| 1976 |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \itemindent %
|
| 1977 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\itemindent
|
| 1978 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt %
|
| 1979 |
|
|
\parskip = \smallskipamount %
|
| 1980 |
|
|
\ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi%
|
| 1981 |
|
|
\def#2{\endgraf\afterenvbreak\endgroup}%
|
| 1982 |
|
|
\def\itemcontents{#1}%
|
| 1983 |
|
|
\let\item=\itemizeitem}
|
| 1984 |
|
|
|
| 1985 |
|
|
% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
|
| 1986 |
|
|
% These are `.?!:;,'
|
| 1987 |
|
|
\def\frenchspacing{\sfcode46=1000 \sfcode63=1000 \sfcode33=1000
|
| 1988 |
|
|
\sfcode58=1000 \sfcode59=1000 \sfcode44=1000 }
|
| 1989 |
|
|
|
| 1990 |
|
|
% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
|
| 1991 |
|
|
% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
|
| 1992 |
|
|
%
|
| 1993 |
|
|
\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
|
| 1994 |
|
|
|
| 1995 |
|
|
% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
|
| 1996 |
|
|
% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
|
| 1997 |
|
|
% argument is the same as `1'.
|
| 1998 |
|
|
%
|
| 1999 |
|
|
\def\enumerate{\parsearg\enumeratezzz}
|
| 2000 |
|
|
\def\enumeratezzz #1{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
|
| 2001 |
|
|
\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
|
| 2002 |
|
|
\begingroup % ended by the @end enumerate
|
| 2003 |
|
|
%
|
| 2004 |
|
|
% If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
|
| 2005 |
|
|
\def\thearg{#1}%
|
| 2006 |
|
|
\ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
|
| 2007 |
|
|
%
|
| 2008 |
|
|
% Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
|
| 2009 |
|
|
% letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
|
| 2010 |
|
|
% (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
|
| 2011 |
|
|
% This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
|
| 2012 |
|
|
% all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
|
| 2013 |
|
|
\expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
|
| 2014 |
|
|
\ifx\rest\empty
|
| 2015 |
|
|
% Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
|
| 2016 |
|
|
% A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
|
| 2017 |
|
|
% An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
|
| 2018 |
|
|
% not equal to itself.
|
| 2019 |
|
|
% Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
|
| 2020 |
|
|
%
|
| 2021 |
|
|
% We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
|
| 2022 |
|
|
% continuing to look for a <number>.
|
| 2023 |
|
|
%
|
| 2024 |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
|
| 2025 |
|
|
\numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
|
| 2026 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2027 |
|
|
% It's a letter.
|
| 2028 |
|
|
\ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
|
| 2029 |
|
|
\lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
|
| 2030 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2031 |
|
|
\uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
|
| 2032 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2033 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2034 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2035 |
|
|
% Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
|
| 2036 |
|
|
\numericenumerate
|
| 2037 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2038 |
|
|
}
|
| 2039 |
|
|
|
| 2040 |
|
|
% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
|
| 2041 |
|
|
% given in \thearg.
|
| 2042 |
|
|
%
|
| 2043 |
|
|
\def\numericenumerate{%
|
| 2044 |
|
|
\itemno = \thearg
|
| 2045 |
|
|
\startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
|
| 2046 |
|
|
}
|
| 2047 |
|
|
|
| 2048 |
|
|
% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
| 2049 |
|
|
\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
|
| 2050 |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
| 2051 |
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
| 2052 |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
| 2053 |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
| 2054 |
|
|
\errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
| 2055 |
|
|
alphabet}%
|
| 2056 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2057 |
|
|
\char\lccode\itemno
|
| 2058 |
|
|
}%
|
| 2059 |
|
|
}
|
| 2060 |
|
|
|
| 2061 |
|
|
% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
|
| 2062 |
|
|
\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
|
| 2063 |
|
|
\itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
|
| 2064 |
|
|
\startenumeration{%
|
| 2065 |
|
|
% Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
|
| 2066 |
|
|
\ifnum\itemno=0
|
| 2067 |
|
|
\errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
|
| 2068 |
|
|
alphabet}
|
| 2069 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2070 |
|
|
\char\uccode\itemno
|
| 2071 |
|
|
}%
|
| 2072 |
|
|
}
|
| 2073 |
|
|
|
| 2074 |
|
|
% Call itemizey, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
|
| 2075 |
|
|
% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
|
| 2076 |
|
|
% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
|
| 2077 |
|
|
%
|
| 2078 |
|
|
\def\startenumeration#1{%
|
| 2079 |
|
|
\advance\itemno by -1
|
| 2080 |
|
|
\itemizey{#1.}\Eenumerate\flushcr
|
| 2081 |
|
|
}
|
| 2082 |
|
|
|
| 2083 |
|
|
% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
|
| 2084 |
|
|
% to @enumerate.
|
| 2085 |
|
|
%
|
| 2086 |
|
|
\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
|
| 2087 |
|
|
\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
|
| 2088 |
|
|
\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
| 2089 |
|
|
\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
|
| 2090 |
|
|
|
| 2091 |
|
|
% Definition of @item while inside @itemize.
|
| 2092 |
|
|
|
| 2093 |
|
|
\def\itemizeitem{%
|
| 2094 |
|
|
\advance\itemno by 1
|
| 2095 |
|
|
{\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}%
|
| 2096 |
|
|
\ifhmode \errmessage{In hmode at itemizeitem}\fi
|
| 2097 |
|
|
{\parskip=0in \hskip 0pt
|
| 2098 |
|
|
\hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents\hskip \itemmargin}%
|
| 2099 |
|
|
\vadjust{\penalty 1200}}%
|
| 2100 |
|
|
\flushcr}
|
| 2101 |
|
|
|
| 2102 |
|
|
% @multitable macros
|
| 2103 |
|
|
% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
|
| 2104 |
|
|
%
|
| 2105 |
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
|
| 2106 |
|
|
% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
|
| 2107 |
|
|
% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
|
| 2108 |
|
|
% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
|
| 2109 |
|
|
|
| 2110 |
|
|
% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
|
| 2111 |
|
|
|
| 2112 |
|
|
% To make preamble:
|
| 2113 |
|
|
%
|
| 2114 |
|
|
% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
|
| 2115 |
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
|
| 2116 |
|
|
% @item ...
|
| 2117 |
|
|
%
|
| 2118 |
|
|
% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
|
| 2119 |
|
|
% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
|
| 2120 |
|
|
% columns as desired.
|
| 2121 |
|
|
|
| 2122 |
|
|
|
| 2123 |
|
|
% Or use a template:
|
| 2124 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
| 2125 |
|
|
% @item ...
|
| 2126 |
|
|
% using the widest term desired in each column.
|
| 2127 |
|
|
%
|
| 2128 |
|
|
% For those who want to use more than one line's worth of words in
|
| 2129 |
|
|
% the preamble, break the line within one argument and it
|
| 2130 |
|
|
% will parse correctly, i.e.,
|
| 2131 |
|
|
%
|
| 2132 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3
|
| 2133 |
|
|
% template}
|
| 2134 |
|
|
% Not:
|
| 2135 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template}
|
| 2136 |
|
|
% {Column 3 template}
|
| 2137 |
|
|
|
| 2138 |
|
|
% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
|
| 2139 |
|
|
% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
|
| 2140 |
|
|
% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
|
| 2141 |
|
|
% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
|
| 2142 |
|
|
|
| 2143 |
|
|
% @item, @tab, @multitable or @end multitable do not need to be on their
|
| 2144 |
|
|
% own lines, but it will not hurt if they are.
|
| 2145 |
|
|
|
| 2146 |
|
|
% Sample multitable:
|
| 2147 |
|
|
|
| 2148 |
|
|
% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
|
| 2149 |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
|
| 2150 |
|
|
% @item
|
| 2151 |
|
|
% first col stuff
|
| 2152 |
|
|
% @tab
|
| 2153 |
|
|
% second col stuff
|
| 2154 |
|
|
% @tab
|
| 2155 |
|
|
% third col
|
| 2156 |
|
|
% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
|
| 2157 |
|
|
% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
|
| 2158 |
|
|
%
|
| 2159 |
|
|
% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
|
| 2160 |
|
|
% @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
|
| 2161 |
|
|
% @end multitable
|
| 2162 |
|
|
|
| 2163 |
|
|
% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
|
| 2164 |
|
|
% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
|
| 2165 |
|
|
% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
|
| 2166 |
|
|
% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
|
| 2167 |
|
|
% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
|
| 2168 |
|
|
% to baseline.
|
| 2169 |
|
|
% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
|
| 2170 |
|
|
%
|
| 2171 |
|
|
\newskip\multitableparskip
|
| 2172 |
|
|
\newskip\multitableparindent
|
| 2173 |
|
|
\newdimen\multitablecolspace
|
| 2174 |
|
|
\newskip\multitablelinespace
|
| 2175 |
|
|
\multitableparskip=0pt
|
| 2176 |
|
|
\multitableparindent=6pt
|
| 2177 |
|
|
\multitablecolspace=12pt
|
| 2178 |
|
|
\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
| 2179 |
|
|
|
| 2180 |
|
|
% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
|
| 2181 |
|
|
%
|
| 2182 |
|
|
\let\endsetuptable\relax
|
| 2183 |
|
|
\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
|
| 2184 |
|
|
\let\columnfractions\relax
|
| 2185 |
|
|
\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
|
| 2186 |
|
|
\newif\ifsetpercent
|
| 2187 |
|
|
|
| 2188 |
|
|
% #1 is the part of the @columnfraction before the decimal point, which
|
| 2189 |
|
|
% is presumably either 0 or the empty string (but we don't check, we
|
| 2190 |
|
|
% just throw it away). #2 is the decimal part, which we use as the
|
| 2191 |
|
|
% percent of \hsize for this column.
|
| 2192 |
|
|
\def\pickupwholefraction#1.#2 {%
|
| 2193 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| 2194 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{.#2\hsize}%
|
| 2195 |
|
|
\setuptable
|
| 2196 |
|
|
}
|
| 2197 |
|
|
|
| 2198 |
|
|
\newcount\colcount
|
| 2199 |
|
|
\def\setuptable#1{%
|
| 2200 |
|
|
\def\firstarg{#1}%
|
| 2201 |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
|
| 2202 |
|
|
\let\go = \relax
|
| 2203 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2204 |
|
|
\ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
|
| 2205 |
|
|
\global\setpercenttrue
|
| 2206 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2207 |
|
|
\ifsetpercent
|
| 2208 |
|
|
\let\go\pickupwholefraction
|
| 2209 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2210 |
|
|
\global\advance\colcount by 1
|
| 2211 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip }% Add a normal word space as a separator;
|
| 2212 |
|
|
% typically that is always in the input, anyway.
|
| 2213 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
|
| 2214 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2215 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2216 |
|
|
\ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
|
| 2217 |
|
|
% Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
|
| 2218 |
|
|
% we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
|
| 2219 |
|
|
\def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
|
| 2220 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2221 |
|
|
\let\go = \setuptable
|
| 2222 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 2223 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2224 |
|
|
\go
|
| 2225 |
|
|
}
|
| 2226 |
|
|
|
| 2227 |
|
|
% This used to have \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template line is
|
| 2228 |
|
|
% not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just & until we
|
| 2229 |
|
|
% encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
|
| 2230 |
|
|
% --karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
|
| 2231 |
|
|
\def\tab{&}
|
| 2232 |
|
|
|
| 2233 |
|
|
% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
|
| 2234 |
|
|
%
|
| 2235 |
|
|
\def\multitable{\parsearg\dotable}
|
| 2236 |
|
|
\def\dotable#1{\bgroup
|
| 2237 |
|
|
\vskip\parskip
|
| 2238 |
|
|
\let\item\crcr
|
| 2239 |
|
|
\tolerance=9500
|
| 2240 |
|
|
\hbadness=9500
|
| 2241 |
|
|
\setmultitablespacing
|
| 2242 |
|
|
\parskip=\multitableparskip
|
| 2243 |
|
|
\parindent=\multitableparindent
|
| 2244 |
|
|
\overfullrule=0pt
|
| 2245 |
|
|
\global\colcount=0
|
| 2246 |
|
|
\def\Emultitable{\global\setpercentfalse\cr\egroup\egroup}%
|
| 2247 |
|
|
%
|
| 2248 |
|
|
% To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
|
| 2249 |
|
|
\setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
|
| 2250 |
|
|
%
|
| 2251 |
|
|
% \everycr will reset column counter, \colcount, at the end of
|
| 2252 |
|
|
% each line. Every column entry will cause \colcount to advance by one.
|
| 2253 |
|
|
% The table preamble
|
| 2254 |
|
|
% looks at the current \colcount to find the correct column width.
|
| 2255 |
|
|
\everycr{\noalign{%
|
| 2256 |
|
|
%
|
| 2257 |
|
|
% \filbreak%% keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
|
| 2258 |
|
|
% Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the table
|
| 2259 |
|
|
% breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the problem
|
| 2260 |
|
|
% manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
|
| 2261 |
|
|
\global\colcount=0\relax}}%
|
| 2262 |
|
|
%
|
| 2263 |
|
|
% This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
|
| 2264 |
|
|
% be used as many times as user calls for columns.
|
| 2265 |
|
|
% \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
|
| 2266 |
|
|
% continue for many paragraphs if desired.
|
| 2267 |
|
|
\halign\bgroup&\global\advance\colcount by 1\relax
|
| 2268 |
|
|
\multistrut\vtop{\hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
|
| 2269 |
|
|
%
|
| 2270 |
|
|
% In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
|
| 2271 |
|
|
% we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
|
| 2272 |
|
|
% the first one.
|
| 2273 |
|
|
%
|
| 2274 |
|
|
% If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
|
| 2275 |
|
|
% to the width of each template entry.
|
| 2276 |
|
|
%
|
| 2277 |
|
|
% If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
|
| 2278 |
|
|
% use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
|
| 2279 |
|
|
% will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
|
| 2280 |
|
|
% left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
|
| 2281 |
|
|
%
|
| 2282 |
|
|
% Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
|
| 2283 |
|
|
\rightskip=0pt
|
| 2284 |
|
|
\ifnum\colcount=1
|
| 2285 |
|
|
% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
|
| 2286 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by\leftskip
|
| 2287 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2288 |
|
|
\ifsetpercent \else
|
| 2289 |
|
|
% If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
|
| 2290 |
|
|
% we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
|
| 2291 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
|
| 2292 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2293 |
|
|
% In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
|
| 2294 |
|
|
\leftskip=\multitablecolspace
|
| 2295 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2296 |
|
|
% Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
|
| 2297 |
|
|
% blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
|
| 2298 |
|
|
% box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
|
| 2299 |
|
|
% For example:
|
| 2300 |
|
|
% @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
|
| 2301 |
|
|
% @item @code{#}
|
| 2302 |
|
|
% @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
|
| 2303 |
|
|
% Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively marking
|
| 2304 |
|
|
% characters.
|
| 2305 |
|
|
\noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut}\cr
|
| 2306 |
|
|
}
|
| 2307 |
|
|
|
| 2308 |
|
|
\def\setmultitablespacing{% test to see if user has set \multitablelinespace.
|
| 2309 |
|
|
% If so, do nothing. If not, give it an appropriate dimension based on
|
| 2310 |
|
|
% current baselineskip.
|
| 2311 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
|
| 2312 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
|
| 2313 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
|
| 2314 |
|
|
%% strut to put in table in case some entry doesn't have descenders,
|
| 2315 |
|
|
%% to keep lines equally spaced
|
| 2316 |
|
|
\let\multistrut = \strut
|
| 2317 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2318 |
|
|
%% FIXME: what is \box0 supposed to be?
|
| 2319 |
|
|
\gdef\multistrut{\vrule height\multitablelinespace depth\dp0
|
| 2320 |
|
|
width0pt\relax} \fi
|
| 2321 |
|
|
%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
|
| 2322 |
|
|
%% table. If not, do nothing.
|
| 2323 |
|
|
%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
|
| 2324 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
|
| 2325 |
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
| 2326 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
| 2327 |
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
| 2328 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 2329 |
|
|
\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
|
| 2330 |
|
|
\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
|
| 2331 |
|
|
\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
|
| 2332 |
|
|
%% than skip between lines in the table.
|
| 2333 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 2334 |
|
|
|
| 2335 |
|
|
|
| 2336 |
|
|
\message{conditionals,}
|
| 2337 |
|
|
% Prevent errors for section commands.
|
| 2338 |
|
|
% Used in @ignore and in failing conditionals.
|
| 2339 |
|
|
\def\ignoresections{%
|
| 2340 |
|
|
\let\chapter=\relax
|
| 2341 |
|
|
\let\unnumbered=\relax
|
| 2342 |
|
|
\let\top=\relax
|
| 2343 |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsec=\relax
|
| 2344 |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsection=\relax
|
| 2345 |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsec=\relax
|
| 2346 |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsection=\relax
|
| 2347 |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsubsec=\relax
|
| 2348 |
|
|
\let\unnumberedsubsubsection=\relax
|
| 2349 |
|
|
\let\section=\relax
|
| 2350 |
|
|
\let\subsec=\relax
|
| 2351 |
|
|
\let\subsubsec=\relax
|
| 2352 |
|
|
\let\subsection=\relax
|
| 2353 |
|
|
\let\subsubsection=\relax
|
| 2354 |
|
|
\let\appendix=\relax
|
| 2355 |
|
|
\let\appendixsec=\relax
|
| 2356 |
|
|
\let\appendixsection=\relax
|
| 2357 |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsec=\relax
|
| 2358 |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsection=\relax
|
| 2359 |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsubsec=\relax
|
| 2360 |
|
|
\let\appendixsubsubsection=\relax
|
| 2361 |
|
|
\let\contents=\relax
|
| 2362 |
|
|
\let\smallbook=\relax
|
| 2363 |
|
|
\let\titlepage=\relax
|
| 2364 |
|
|
}
|
| 2365 |
|
|
|
| 2366 |
|
|
% Used in nested conditionals, where we have to parse the Texinfo source
|
| 2367 |
|
|
% and so want to turn off most commands, in case they are used
|
| 2368 |
|
|
% incorrectly.
|
| 2369 |
|
|
%
|
| 2370 |
|
|
\def\ignoremorecommands{%
|
| 2371 |
|
|
\let\defcodeindex = \relax
|
| 2372 |
|
|
\let\defcv = \relax
|
| 2373 |
|
|
\let\deffn = \relax
|
| 2374 |
|
|
\let\deffnx = \relax
|
| 2375 |
|
|
\let\defindex = \relax
|
| 2376 |
|
|
\let\defivar = \relax
|
| 2377 |
|
|
\let\defmac = \relax
|
| 2378 |
|
|
\let\defmethod = \relax
|
| 2379 |
|
|
\let\defop = \relax
|
| 2380 |
|
|
\let\defopt = \relax
|
| 2381 |
|
|
\let\defspec = \relax
|
| 2382 |
|
|
\let\deftp = \relax
|
| 2383 |
|
|
\let\deftypefn = \relax
|
| 2384 |
|
|
\let\deftypefun = \relax
|
| 2385 |
|
|
\let\deftypeivar = \relax
|
| 2386 |
|
|
\let\deftypeop = \relax
|
| 2387 |
|
|
\let\deftypevar = \relax
|
| 2388 |
|
|
\let\deftypevr = \relax
|
| 2389 |
|
|
\let\defun = \relax
|
| 2390 |
|
|
\let\defvar = \relax
|
| 2391 |
|
|
\let\defvr = \relax
|
| 2392 |
|
|
\let\ref = \relax
|
| 2393 |
|
|
\let\xref = \relax
|
| 2394 |
|
|
\let\printindex = \relax
|
| 2395 |
|
|
\let\pxref = \relax
|
| 2396 |
|
|
\let\settitle = \relax
|
| 2397 |
|
|
\let\setchapternewpage = \relax
|
| 2398 |
|
|
\let\setchapterstyle = \relax
|
| 2399 |
|
|
\let\everyheading = \relax
|
| 2400 |
|
|
\let\evenheading = \relax
|
| 2401 |
|
|
\let\oddheading = \relax
|
| 2402 |
|
|
\let\everyfooting = \relax
|
| 2403 |
|
|
\let\evenfooting = \relax
|
| 2404 |
|
|
\let\oddfooting = \relax
|
| 2405 |
|
|
\let\headings = \relax
|
| 2406 |
|
|
\let\include = \relax
|
| 2407 |
|
|
\let\lowersections = \relax
|
| 2408 |
|
|
\let\down = \relax
|
| 2409 |
|
|
\let\raisesections = \relax
|
| 2410 |
|
|
\let\up = \relax
|
| 2411 |
|
|
\let\set = \relax
|
| 2412 |
|
|
\let\clear = \relax
|
| 2413 |
|
|
\let\item = \relax
|
| 2414 |
|
|
}
|
| 2415 |
|
|
|
| 2416 |
|
|
% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, @ifplaintext, @ifnottex, @html, @menu,
|
| 2417 |
|
|
% @direntry, and @documentdescription.
|
| 2418 |
|
|
%
|
| 2419 |
|
|
\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
|
| 2420 |
|
|
\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
|
| 2421 |
|
|
\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
|
| 2422 |
|
|
\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
|
| 2423 |
|
|
\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
|
| 2424 |
|
|
\def\html{\doignore{html}}
|
| 2425 |
|
|
\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
|
| 2426 |
|
|
\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
|
| 2427 |
|
|
\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
|
| 2428 |
|
|
\def\documentdescriptionword{documentdescription}
|
| 2429 |
|
|
|
| 2430 |
|
|
% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
|
| 2431 |
|
|
% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
|
| 2432 |
|
|
\let\dircategory = \comment
|
| 2433 |
|
|
|
| 2434 |
|
|
% Ignore text until a line `@end #1'.
|
| 2435 |
|
|
%
|
| 2436 |
|
|
\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
|
| 2437 |
|
|
% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
| 2438 |
|
|
\ignoresections
|
| 2439 |
|
|
%
|
| 2440 |
|
|
% Define a command to swallow text until we reach `@end #1'.
|
| 2441 |
|
|
% This @ is a catcode 12 token (that is the normal catcode of @ in
|
| 2442 |
|
|
% this texinfo.tex file). We change the catcode of @ below to match.
|
| 2443 |
|
|
\long\def\doignoretext##1@end #1{\enddoignore}%
|
| 2444 |
|
|
%
|
| 2445 |
|
|
% Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
|
| 2446 |
|
|
\catcode32 = 10
|
| 2447 |
|
|
%
|
| 2448 |
|
|
% Ignore braces, too, so mismatched braces don't cause trouble.
|
| 2449 |
|
|
\catcode`\{ = 9
|
| 2450 |
|
|
\catcode`\} = 9
|
| 2451 |
|
|
%
|
| 2452 |
|
|
% We must not have @c interpreted as a control sequence.
|
| 2453 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = 12
|
| 2454 |
|
|
%
|
| 2455 |
|
|
\def\ignoreword{#1}%
|
| 2456 |
|
|
\ifx\ignoreword\documentdescriptionword
|
| 2457 |
|
|
% The c kludge breaks documentdescription, since
|
| 2458 |
|
|
% `documentdescription' contains a `c'. Means not everything will
|
| 2459 |
|
|
% be ignored inside @documentdescription, but oh well...
|
| 2460 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2461 |
|
|
% Make the letter c a comment character so that the rest of the line
|
| 2462 |
|
|
% will be ignored. This way, the document can have (for example)
|
| 2463 |
|
|
% @c @end ifinfo
|
| 2464 |
|
|
% and the @end ifinfo will be properly ignored.
|
| 2465 |
|
|
% (We've just changed @ to catcode 12.)
|
| 2466 |
|
|
\catcode`\c = 14
|
| 2467 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2468 |
|
|
%
|
| 2469 |
|
|
% And now expand the command defined above.
|
| 2470 |
|
|
\doignoretext
|
| 2471 |
|
|
}
|
| 2472 |
|
|
|
| 2473 |
|
|
% What we do to finish off ignored text.
|
| 2474 |
|
|
%
|
| 2475 |
|
|
\def\enddoignore{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
|
| 2476 |
|
|
|
| 2477 |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnedobs\warnedobsfalse
|
| 2478 |
|
|
\def\obstexwarn{%
|
| 2479 |
|
|
\ifwarnedobs\relax\else
|
| 2480 |
|
|
% We need to warn folks that they may have trouble with TeX 3.0.
|
| 2481 |
|
|
% This uses \immediate\write16 rather than \message to get newlines.
|
| 2482 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{}
|
| 2483 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{WARNING: for users of Unix TeX 3.0!}
|
| 2484 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{This manual trips a bug in TeX version 3.0 (tex hangs).}
|
| 2485 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{If you are running another version of TeX, relax.}
|
| 2486 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{If you are running Unix TeX 3.0, kill this TeX process.}
|
| 2487 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ Then upgrade your TeX installation if you can.}
|
| 2488 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ (See ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/TeX.README.)}
|
| 2489 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{If you are stuck with version 3.0, run the}
|
| 2490 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ script ``tex3patch'' from the Texinfo distribution}
|
| 2491 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{ to use a workaround.}
|
| 2492 |
|
|
\immediate\write16{}
|
| 2493 |
|
|
\global\warnedobstrue
|
| 2494 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2495 |
|
|
}
|
| 2496 |
|
|
|
| 2497 |
|
|
% **In TeX 3.0, setting text in \nullfont hangs tex. For a
|
| 2498 |
|
|
% workaround (which requires the file ``dummy.tfm'' to be installed),
|
| 2499 |
|
|
% uncomment the following line:
|
| 2500 |
|
|
%%%%%\font\nullfont=dummy\let\obstexwarn=\relax
|
| 2501 |
|
|
|
| 2502 |
|
|
% Ignore text, except that we keep track of conditional commands for
|
| 2503 |
|
|
% purposes of nesting, up to an `@end #1' command.
|
| 2504 |
|
|
%
|
| 2505 |
|
|
\def\nestedignore#1{%
|
| 2506 |
|
|
\obstexwarn
|
| 2507 |
|
|
% We must actually expand the ignored text to look for the @end
|
| 2508 |
|
|
% command, so that nested ignore constructs work. Thus, we put the
|
| 2509 |
|
|
% text into a \vbox and then do nothing with the result. To minimize
|
| 2510 |
|
|
% the change of memory overflow, we follow the approach outlined on
|
| 2511 |
|
|
% page 401 of the TeXbook: make the current font be a dummy font.
|
| 2512 |
|
|
%
|
| 2513 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \vbox\bgroup
|
| 2514 |
|
|
% Don't complain about control sequences we have declared \outer.
|
| 2515 |
|
|
\ignoresections
|
| 2516 |
|
|
%
|
| 2517 |
|
|
% Define `@end #1' to end the box, which will in turn undefine the
|
| 2518 |
|
|
% @end command again.
|
| 2519 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname E#1\endcsname{\egroup\ignorespaces}%
|
| 2520 |
|
|
%
|
| 2521 |
|
|
% We are going to be parsing Texinfo commands. Most cause no
|
| 2522 |
|
|
% trouble when they are used incorrectly, but some commands do
|
| 2523 |
|
|
% complicated argument parsing or otherwise get confused, so we
|
| 2524 |
|
|
% undefine them.
|
| 2525 |
|
|
%
|
| 2526 |
|
|
% We can't do anything about stray @-signs, unfortunately;
|
| 2527 |
|
|
% they'll produce `undefined control sequence' errors.
|
| 2528 |
|
|
\ignoremorecommands
|
| 2529 |
|
|
%
|
| 2530 |
|
|
% Set the current font to be \nullfont, a TeX primitive, and define
|
| 2531 |
|
|
% all the font commands to also use \nullfont. We don't use
|
| 2532 |
|
|
% dummy.tfm, as suggested in the TeXbook, because not all sites
|
| 2533 |
|
|
% might have that installed. Therefore, math mode will still
|
| 2534 |
|
|
% produce output, but that should be an extremely small amount of
|
| 2535 |
|
|
% stuff compared to the main input.
|
| 2536 |
|
|
%
|
| 2537 |
|
|
\nullfont
|
| 2538 |
|
|
\let\tenrm=\nullfont \let\tenit=\nullfont \let\tensl=\nullfont
|
| 2539 |
|
|
\let\tenbf=\nullfont \let\tentt=\nullfont \let\smallcaps=\nullfont
|
| 2540 |
|
|
\let\tensf=\nullfont
|
| 2541 |
|
|
% Similarly for index fonts.
|
| 2542 |
|
|
\let\smallrm=\nullfont \let\smallit=\nullfont \let\smallsl=\nullfont
|
| 2543 |
|
|
\let\smallbf=\nullfont \let\smalltt=\nullfont \let\smallsc=\nullfont
|
| 2544 |
|
|
\let\smallsf=\nullfont
|
| 2545 |
|
|
% Similarly for smallexample fonts.
|
| 2546 |
|
|
\let\smallerrm=\nullfont \let\smallerit=\nullfont \let\smallersl=\nullfont
|
| 2547 |
|
|
\let\smallerbf=\nullfont \let\smallertt=\nullfont \let\smallersc=\nullfont
|
| 2548 |
|
|
\let\smallersf=\nullfont
|
| 2549 |
|
|
%
|
| 2550 |
|
|
% Don't complain when characters are missing from the fonts.
|
| 2551 |
|
|
\tracinglostchars = 0
|
| 2552 |
|
|
%
|
| 2553 |
|
|
% Don't bother to do space factor calculations.
|
| 2554 |
|
|
\frenchspacing
|
| 2555 |
|
|
%
|
| 2556 |
|
|
% Don't report underfull hboxes.
|
| 2557 |
|
|
\hbadness = 10000
|
| 2558 |
|
|
%
|
| 2559 |
|
|
% Do minimal line-breaking.
|
| 2560 |
|
|
\pretolerance = 10000
|
| 2561 |
|
|
%
|
| 2562 |
|
|
% Do not execute instructions in @tex
|
| 2563 |
|
|
\def\tex{\doignore{tex}}%
|
| 2564 |
|
|
% Do not execute macro definitions.
|
| 2565 |
|
|
% `c' is a comment character, so the word `macro' will get cut off.
|
| 2566 |
|
|
\def\macro{\doignore{ma}}%
|
| 2567 |
|
|
}
|
| 2568 |
|
|
|
| 2569 |
|
|
% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
|
| 2570 |
|
|
% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
|
| 2571 |
|
|
%
|
| 2572 |
|
|
% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
|
| 2573 |
|
|
% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
|
| 2574 |
|
|
% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
|
| 2575 |
|
|
% didn't need it. Make sure the catcode of space is correct to avoid
|
| 2576 |
|
|
% losing inside @example, for instance.
|
| 2577 |
|
|
%
|
| 2578 |
|
|
\def\set{\begingroup\catcode` =10
|
| 2579 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12 % Allow - and _ in VAR.
|
| 2580 |
|
|
\parsearg\setxxx}
|
| 2581 |
|
|
\def\setxxx#1{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
|
| 2582 |
|
|
\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
|
| 2583 |
|
|
\def\temp{#2}%
|
| 2584 |
|
|
\ifx\temp\empty \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname = \empty
|
| 2585 |
|
|
\else \setzzz{#1}#2\endsetzzz % Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
|
| 2586 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2587 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 2588 |
|
|
}
|
| 2589 |
|
|
% Can't use \xdef to pre-expand #2 and save some time, since \temp or
|
| 2590 |
|
|
% \next or other control sequences that we've defined might get us into
|
| 2591 |
|
|
% an infinite loop. Consider `@set foo @cite{bar}'.
|
| 2592 |
|
|
\def\setzzz#1#2 \endsetzzz{\expandafter\gdef\csname SET#1\endcsname{#2}}
|
| 2593 |
|
|
|
| 2594 |
|
|
% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
|
| 2595 |
|
|
%
|
| 2596 |
|
|
\def\clear{\parsearg\clearxxx}
|
| 2597 |
|
|
\def\clearxxx#1{\global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax}
|
| 2598 |
|
|
|
| 2599 |
|
|
% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
|
| 2600 |
|
|
{
|
| 2601 |
|
|
\catcode`\_ = \active
|
| 2602 |
|
|
%
|
| 2603 |
|
|
% We might end up with active _ or - characters in the argument if
|
| 2604 |
|
|
% we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}. So \let any
|
| 2605 |
|
|
% such active characters to their normal equivalents.
|
| 2606 |
|
|
\gdef\value{\begingroup
|
| 2607 |
|
|
\catcode`\-=12 \catcode`\_=12
|
| 2608 |
|
|
\indexbreaks \let_\normalunderscore
|
| 2609 |
|
|
\valuexxx}
|
| 2610 |
|
|
}
|
| 2611 |
|
|
\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
|
| 2612 |
|
|
|
| 2613 |
|
|
% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
|
| 2614 |
|
|
% properly in indexes (we \let\value to this in \indexdummies). Ones
|
| 2615 |
|
|
% whose names contain - or _ still won't work, but we can't do anything
|
| 2616 |
|
|
% about that. The command has to be fully expandable, since the result
|
| 2617 |
|
|
% winds up in the index file. This means that if the variable's value
|
| 2618 |
|
|
% contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain it will fail
|
| 2619 |
|
|
% (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work to do a
|
| 2620 |
|
|
% one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
|
| 2621 |
|
|
%
|
| 2622 |
|
|
\def\expandablevalue#1{%
|
| 2623 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
| 2624 |
|
|
{[No value for ``#1'']}%
|
| 2625 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2626 |
|
|
\csname SET#1\endcsname
|
| 2627 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2628 |
|
|
}
|
| 2629 |
|
|
|
| 2630 |
|
|
% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
|
| 2631 |
|
|
% with @set.
|
| 2632 |
|
|
%
|
| 2633 |
|
|
\def\ifset{\parsearg\ifsetxxx}
|
| 2634 |
|
|
\def\ifsetxxx #1{%
|
| 2635 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
| 2636 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifsetfail
|
| 2637 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2638 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifsetsucceed
|
| 2639 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2640 |
|
|
}
|
| 2641 |
|
|
\def\ifsetsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifset}}
|
| 2642 |
|
|
\def\ifsetfail{\nestedignore{ifset}}
|
| 2643 |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifset}
|
| 2644 |
|
|
|
| 2645 |
|
|
% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
|
| 2646 |
|
|
% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
|
| 2647 |
|
|
%
|
| 2648 |
|
|
\def\ifclear{\parsearg\ifclearxxx}
|
| 2649 |
|
|
\def\ifclearxxx #1{%
|
| 2650 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
|
| 2651 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifclearsucceed
|
| 2652 |
|
|
\else
|
| 2653 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifclearfail
|
| 2654 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2655 |
|
|
}
|
| 2656 |
|
|
\def\ifclearsucceed{\conditionalsucceed{ifclear}}
|
| 2657 |
|
|
\def\ifclearfail{\nestedignore{ifclear}}
|
| 2658 |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifclear}
|
| 2659 |
|
|
|
| 2660 |
|
|
% @iftex, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext always succeed; we
|
| 2661 |
|
|
% read the text following, through the first @end iftex (etc.). Make
|
| 2662 |
|
|
% `@end iftex' (etc.) valid only after an @iftex.
|
| 2663 |
|
|
%
|
| 2664 |
|
|
\def\iftex{\conditionalsucceed{iftex}}
|
| 2665 |
|
|
\def\ifnothtml{\conditionalsucceed{ifnothtml}}
|
| 2666 |
|
|
\def\ifnotinfo{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotinfo}}
|
| 2667 |
|
|
\def\ifnotplaintext{\conditionalsucceed{ifnotplaintext}}
|
| 2668 |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{iftex}
|
| 2669 |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifnothtml}
|
| 2670 |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotinfo}
|
| 2671 |
|
|
\defineunmatchedend{ifnotplaintext}
|
| 2672 |
|
|
|
| 2673 |
|
|
% We can't just want to start a group at @iftex (etc.) and end it at
|
| 2674 |
|
|
% @end iftex, since then @set commands inside the conditional have no
|
| 2675 |
|
|
% effect (they'd get reverted at the end of the group). So we must
|
| 2676 |
|
|
% define \Eiftex to redefine itself to be its previous value. (We can't
|
| 2677 |
|
|
% just define it to fail again with an ``unmatched end'' error, since
|
| 2678 |
|
|
% the @ifset might be nested.)
|
| 2679 |
|
|
%
|
| 2680 |
|
|
\def\conditionalsucceed#1{%
|
| 2681 |
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
| 2682 |
|
|
% Remember the current value of \E#1.
|
| 2683 |
|
|
\let\nece{prevE#1} = \nece{E#1}%
|
| 2684 |
|
|
%
|
| 2685 |
|
|
% At the `@end #1', redefine \E#1 to be its previous value.
|
| 2686 |
|
|
\def\nece{E#1}{\let\nece{E#1} = \nece{prevE#1}}%
|
| 2687 |
|
|
}%
|
| 2688 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 2689 |
|
|
}
|
| 2690 |
|
|
|
| 2691 |
|
|
% We need to expand lots of \csname's, but we don't want to expand the
|
| 2692 |
|
|
% control sequences after we've constructed them.
|
| 2693 |
|
|
%
|
| 2694 |
|
|
\def\nece#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
|
| 2695 |
|
|
|
| 2696 |
|
|
% @defininfoenclose.
|
| 2697 |
|
|
\let\definfoenclose=\comment
|
| 2698 |
|
|
|
| 2699 |
|
|
|
| 2700 |
|
|
\message{indexing,}
|
| 2701 |
|
|
% Index generation facilities
|
| 2702 |
|
|
|
| 2703 |
|
|
% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
|
| 2704 |
|
|
% except not \outer, so it can be used within \newindex.
|
| 2705 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=11
|
| 2706 |
|
|
\gdef\newwrite{\alloc@7\write\chardef\sixt@@n}}
|
| 2707 |
|
|
|
| 2708 |
|
|
% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
|
| 2709 |
|
|
% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
|
| 2710 |
|
|
% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
|
| 2711 |
|
|
% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
|
| 2712 |
|
|
% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
|
| 2713 |
|
|
% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
|
| 2714 |
|
|
% for the sake of vms.
|
| 2715 |
|
|
%
|
| 2716 |
|
|
\def\newindex#1{%
|
| 2717 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 2718 |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
| 2719 |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
|
| 2720 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2721 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
|
| 2722 |
|
|
\noexpand\doindex{#1}}
|
| 2723 |
|
|
}
|
| 2724 |
|
|
|
| 2725 |
|
|
% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
|
| 2726 |
|
|
%
|
| 2727 |
|
|
\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
|
| 2728 |
|
|
|
| 2729 |
|
|
% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
|
| 2730 |
|
|
%
|
| 2731 |
|
|
\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
|
| 2732 |
|
|
%
|
| 2733 |
|
|
\def\newcodeindex#1{%
|
| 2734 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 2735 |
|
|
\expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
|
| 2736 |
|
|
\openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
|
| 2737 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2738 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
|
| 2739 |
|
|
\noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
|
| 2740 |
|
|
}
|
| 2741 |
|
|
|
| 2742 |
|
|
|
| 2743 |
|
|
% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
|
| 2744 |
|
|
% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
|
| 2745 |
|
|
%
|
| 2746 |
|
|
% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
|
| 2747 |
|
|
% inside @code.
|
| 2748 |
|
|
%
|
| 2749 |
|
|
\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
|
| 2750 |
|
|
\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
|
| 2751 |
|
|
|
| 2752 |
|
|
% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
|
| 2753 |
|
|
% #3 the target index (bar).
|
| 2754 |
|
|
\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
|
| 2755 |
|
|
% Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
|
| 2756 |
|
|
% closing the target index.
|
| 2757 |
|
|
\expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \undefined
|
| 2758 |
|
|
% The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
|
| 2759 |
|
|
% Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
|
| 2760 |
|
|
\expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
|
| 2761 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname\donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
|
| 2762 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2763 |
|
|
% redefine \fooindfile:
|
| 2764 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
|
| 2765 |
|
|
\expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
|
| 2766 |
|
|
% redefine \fooindex:
|
| 2767 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
|
| 2768 |
|
|
}
|
| 2769 |
|
|
|
| 2770 |
|
|
% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
|
| 2771 |
|
|
% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
|
| 2772 |
|
|
% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
|
| 2773 |
|
|
|
| 2774 |
|
|
% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
|
| 2775 |
|
|
% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
|
| 2776 |
|
|
|
| 2777 |
|
|
% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
|
| 2778 |
|
|
% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
|
| 2779 |
|
|
|
| 2780 |
|
|
\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
|
| 2781 |
|
|
\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
|
| 2782 |
|
|
|
| 2783 |
|
|
% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
|
| 2784 |
|
|
\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
|
| 2785 |
|
|
\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
|
| 2786 |
|
|
|
| 2787 |
|
|
% Take care of texinfo commands likely to appear in an index entry.
|
| 2788 |
|
|
% (Must be a way to avoid doing expansion at all, and thus not have to
|
| 2789 |
|
|
% laboriously list every single command here.)
|
| 2790 |
|
|
%
|
| 2791 |
|
|
\def\indexdummies{%
|
| 2792 |
|
|
\def\ { }%
|
| 2793 |
|
|
\def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in aux files.
|
| 2794 |
|
|
% Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
|
| 2795 |
|
|
% But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
|
| 2796 |
|
|
% braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
|
| 2797 |
|
|
\let\{ = \mylbrace
|
| 2798 |
|
|
\let\} = \myrbrace
|
| 2799 |
|
|
\def\_{{\realbackslash _}}%
|
| 2800 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
| 2801 |
|
|
%
|
| 2802 |
|
|
% Take care of the plain tex accent commands.
|
| 2803 |
|
|
\def\,##1{\realbackslash ,{##1}}%
|
| 2804 |
|
|
\def\"{\realbackslash "}%
|
| 2805 |
|
|
\def\`{\realbackslash `}%
|
| 2806 |
|
|
\def\'{\realbackslash '}%
|
| 2807 |
|
|
\def\^{\realbackslash ^}%
|
| 2808 |
|
|
\def\~{\realbackslash ~}%
|
| 2809 |
|
|
\def\={\realbackslash =}%
|
| 2810 |
|
|
\def\b{\realbackslash b}%
|
| 2811 |
|
|
\def\c{\realbackslash c}%
|
| 2812 |
|
|
\def\d{\realbackslash d}%
|
| 2813 |
|
|
\def\u{\realbackslash u}%
|
| 2814 |
|
|
\def\v{\realbackslash v}%
|
| 2815 |
|
|
\def\H{\realbackslash H}%
|
| 2816 |
|
|
\def\dotless##1{\realbackslash dotless {##1}}%
|
| 2817 |
|
|
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
| 2818 |
|
|
\def\AA{\realbackslash AA}%
|
| 2819 |
|
|
\def\AE{\realbackslash AE}%
|
| 2820 |
|
|
\def\L{\realbackslash L}%
|
| 2821 |
|
|
\def\OE{\realbackslash OE}%
|
| 2822 |
|
|
\def\O{\realbackslash O}%
|
| 2823 |
|
|
\def\aa{\realbackslash aa}%
|
| 2824 |
|
|
\def\ae{\realbackslash ae}%
|
| 2825 |
|
|
\def\l{\realbackslash l}%
|
| 2826 |
|
|
\def\oe{\realbackslash oe}%
|
| 2827 |
|
|
\def\o{\realbackslash o}%
|
| 2828 |
|
|
\def\ss{\realbackslash ss}%
|
| 2829 |
|
|
%
|
| 2830 |
|
|
% Although these internals commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
|
| 2831 |
|
|
\def\bf{\realbackslash bf }%
|
| 2832 |
|
|
\def\gtr{\realbackslash gtr}%
|
| 2833 |
|
|
\def\hat{\realbackslash hat}%
|
| 2834 |
|
|
\def\less{\realbackslash less}%
|
| 2835 |
|
|
%\def\rm{\realbackslash rm }%
|
| 2836 |
|
|
\def\sf{\realbackslash sf}%
|
| 2837 |
|
|
\def\sl{\realbackslash sl }%
|
| 2838 |
|
|
\def\tclose##1{\realbackslash tclose {##1}}%
|
| 2839 |
|
|
\def\tt{\realbackslash tt}%
|
| 2840 |
|
|
%
|
| 2841 |
|
|
\def\b##1{\realbackslash b {##1}}%
|
| 2842 |
|
|
\def\i##1{\realbackslash i {##1}}%
|
| 2843 |
|
|
\def\sc##1{\realbackslash sc {##1}}%
|
| 2844 |
|
|
\def\t##1{\realbackslash t {##1}}%
|
| 2845 |
|
|
\def\r##1{\realbackslash r {##1}}%
|
| 2846 |
|
|
%
|
| 2847 |
|
|
\def\TeX{\realbackslash TeX}%
|
| 2848 |
|
|
\def\acronym##1{\realbackslash acronym {##1}}%
|
| 2849 |
|
|
\def\cite##1{\realbackslash cite {##1}}%
|
| 2850 |
|
|
\def\code##1{\realbackslash code {##1}}%
|
| 2851 |
|
|
\def\command##1{\realbackslash command {##1}}%
|
| 2852 |
|
|
\def\dfn##1{\realbackslash dfn {##1}}%
|
| 2853 |
|
|
\def\dots{\realbackslash dots }%
|
| 2854 |
|
|
\def\emph##1{\realbackslash emph {##1}}%
|
| 2855 |
|
|
\def\env##1{\realbackslash env {##1}}%
|
| 2856 |
|
|
\def\file##1{\realbackslash file {##1}}%
|
| 2857 |
|
|
\def\kbd##1{\realbackslash kbd {##1}}%
|
| 2858 |
|
|
\def\key##1{\realbackslash key {##1}}%
|
| 2859 |
|
|
\def\math##1{\realbackslash math {##1}}%
|
| 2860 |
|
|
\def\option##1{\realbackslash option {##1}}%
|
| 2861 |
|
|
\def\samp##1{\realbackslash samp {##1}}%
|
| 2862 |
|
|
\def\strong##1{\realbackslash strong {##1}}%
|
| 2863 |
|
|
\def\uref##1{\realbackslash uref {##1}}%
|
| 2864 |
|
|
\def\url##1{\realbackslash url {##1}}%
|
| 2865 |
|
|
\def\var##1{\realbackslash var {##1}}%
|
| 2866 |
|
|
\def\w{\realbackslash w }%
|
| 2867 |
|
|
%
|
| 2868 |
|
|
% These math commands don't seem likely to be used in index entries.
|
| 2869 |
|
|
\def\copyright{\realbackslash copyright}%
|
| 2870 |
|
|
\def\equiv{\realbackslash equiv}%
|
| 2871 |
|
|
\def\error{\realbackslash error}%
|
| 2872 |
|
|
\def\expansion{\realbackslash expansion}%
|
| 2873 |
|
|
\def\point{\realbackslash point}%
|
| 2874 |
|
|
\def\print{\realbackslash print}%
|
| 2875 |
|
|
\def\result{\realbackslash result}%
|
| 2876 |
|
|
%
|
| 2877 |
|
|
% Handle some cases of @value -- where the variable name does not
|
| 2878 |
|
|
% contain - or _, and the value does not contain any
|
| 2879 |
|
|
% (non-fully-expandable) commands.
|
| 2880 |
|
|
\let\value = \expandablevalue
|
| 2881 |
|
|
%
|
| 2882 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 2883 |
|
|
% Turn off macro expansion
|
| 2884 |
|
|
\turnoffmacros
|
| 2885 |
|
|
}
|
| 2886 |
|
|
|
| 2887 |
|
|
% If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
|
| 2888 |
|
|
% therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
|
| 2889 |
|
|
% expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
|
| 2890 |
|
|
{\obeyspaces
|
| 2891 |
|
|
\gdef\unsepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\space}}
|
| 2892 |
|
|
|
| 2893 |
|
|
% \indexnofonts no-ops all font-change commands.
|
| 2894 |
|
|
% This is used when outputting the strings to sort the index by.
|
| 2895 |
|
|
\def\indexdummyfont#1{#1}
|
| 2896 |
|
|
\def\indexdummytex{TeX}
|
| 2897 |
|
|
\def\indexdummydots{...}
|
| 2898 |
|
|
|
| 2899 |
|
|
\def\indexnofonts{%
|
| 2900 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
| 2901 |
|
|
% how to handle braces?
|
| 2902 |
|
|
\def\_{\normalunderscore}%
|
| 2903 |
|
|
%
|
| 2904 |
|
|
\let\,=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2905 |
|
|
\let\"=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2906 |
|
|
\let\`=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2907 |
|
|
\let\'=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2908 |
|
|
\let\^=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2909 |
|
|
\let\~=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2910 |
|
|
\let\==\indexdummyfont
|
| 2911 |
|
|
\let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2912 |
|
|
\let\c=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2913 |
|
|
\let\d=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2914 |
|
|
\let\u=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2915 |
|
|
\let\v=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2916 |
|
|
\let\H=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2917 |
|
|
\let\dotless=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2918 |
|
|
% Take care of the plain tex special European modified letters.
|
| 2919 |
|
|
\def\AA{AA}%
|
| 2920 |
|
|
\def\AE{AE}%
|
| 2921 |
|
|
\def\L{L}%
|
| 2922 |
|
|
\def\OE{OE}%
|
| 2923 |
|
|
\def\O{O}%
|
| 2924 |
|
|
\def\aa{aa}%
|
| 2925 |
|
|
\def\ae{ae}%
|
| 2926 |
|
|
\def\l{l}%
|
| 2927 |
|
|
\def\oe{oe}%
|
| 2928 |
|
|
\def\o{o}%
|
| 2929 |
|
|
\def\ss{ss}%
|
| 2930 |
|
|
%
|
| 2931 |
|
|
% Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
|
| 2932 |
|
|
% and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
|
| 2933 |
|
|
% Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
|
| 2934 |
|
|
%\let\tt=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2935 |
|
|
%
|
| 2936 |
|
|
\let\b=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2937 |
|
|
\let\i=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2938 |
|
|
\let\r=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2939 |
|
|
\let\sc=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2940 |
|
|
\let\t=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2941 |
|
|
%
|
| 2942 |
|
|
\let\TeX=\indexdummytex
|
| 2943 |
|
|
\let\acronym=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2944 |
|
|
\let\cite=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2945 |
|
|
\let\code=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2946 |
|
|
\let\command=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2947 |
|
|
\let\dfn=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2948 |
|
|
\let\dots=\indexdummydots
|
| 2949 |
|
|
\let\emph=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2950 |
|
|
\let\env=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2951 |
|
|
\let\file=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2952 |
|
|
\let\kbd=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2953 |
|
|
\let\key=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2954 |
|
|
\let\math=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2955 |
|
|
\let\option=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2956 |
|
|
\let\samp=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2957 |
|
|
\let\strong=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2958 |
|
|
\let\uref=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2959 |
|
|
\let\url=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2960 |
|
|
\let\var=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2961 |
|
|
\let\w=\indexdummyfont
|
| 2962 |
|
|
}
|
| 2963 |
|
|
|
| 2964 |
|
|
% To define \realbackslash, we must make \ not be an escape.
|
| 2965 |
|
|
% We must first make another character (@) an escape
|
| 2966 |
|
|
% so we do not become unable to do a definition.
|
| 2967 |
|
|
|
| 2968 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\other
|
| 2969 |
|
|
@gdef@realbackslash{\}}
|
| 2970 |
|
|
|
| 2971 |
|
|
\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
|
| 2972 |
|
|
\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
|
| 2973 |
|
|
|
| 2974 |
|
|
% For \ifx comparisons.
|
| 2975 |
|
|
\def\emptymacro{\empty}
|
| 2976 |
|
|
|
| 2977 |
|
|
% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
|
| 2978 |
|
|
%
|
| 2979 |
|
|
\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}\empty}
|
| 2980 |
|
|
|
| 2981 |
|
|
% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
|
| 2982 |
|
|
% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
|
| 2983 |
|
|
% \empty if called from \doind, as we usually are. The main exception
|
| 2984 |
|
|
% is with defuns, which call us directly.
|
| 2985 |
|
|
%
|
| 2986 |
|
|
\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
|
| 2987 |
|
|
% Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
|
| 2988 |
|
|
\ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
|
| 2989 |
|
|
\insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt #2}}%
|
| 2990 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 2991 |
|
|
{%
|
| 2992 |
|
|
\count255=\lastpenalty
|
| 2993 |
|
|
{%
|
| 2994 |
|
|
\indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
|
| 2995 |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\
|
| 2996 |
|
|
{%
|
| 2997 |
|
|
\let\folio = 0% We will expand all macros now EXCEPT \folio.
|
| 2998 |
|
|
\def\rawbackslashxx{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
|
| 2999 |
|
|
% so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
|
| 3000 |
|
|
%
|
| 3001 |
|
|
\def\thirdarg{#3}%
|
| 3002 |
|
|
%
|
| 3003 |
|
|
% If third arg is present, precede it with space in sort key.
|
| 3004 |
|
|
\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro
|
| 3005 |
|
|
\let\subentry = \empty
|
| 3006 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3007 |
|
|
\def\subentry{ #3}%
|
| 3008 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3009 |
|
|
%
|
| 3010 |
|
|
% First process the index entry with all font commands turned
|
| 3011 |
|
|
% off to get the string to sort by.
|
| 3012 |
|
|
{\indexnofonts \xdef\indexsorttmp{#2\subentry}}%
|
| 3013 |
|
|
%
|
| 3014 |
|
|
% Now the real index entry with the fonts.
|
| 3015 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#2}%
|
| 3016 |
|
|
%
|
| 3017 |
|
|
% If the third (subentry) arg is present, add it to the index
|
| 3018 |
|
|
% line to write.
|
| 3019 |
|
|
\ifx\thirdarg\emptymacro \else
|
| 3020 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0{#3}}%
|
| 3021 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3022 |
|
|
%
|
| 3023 |
|
|
% Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
|
| 3024 |
|
|
% the original text, including any font commands. We write
|
| 3025 |
|
|
% three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
|
| 3026 |
|
|
% subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
|
| 3027 |
|
|
% sorted result.
|
| 3028 |
|
|
\edef\temp{%
|
| 3029 |
|
|
\write\csname#1indfile\endcsname{%
|
| 3030 |
|
|
\realbackslash entry{\indexsorttmp}{\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
|
| 3031 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3032 |
|
|
%
|
| 3033 |
|
|
% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
|
| 3034 |
|
|
% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
|
| 3035 |
|
|
% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
|
| 3036 |
|
|
% \write will make \lastskip zero. The result is that sequences
|
| 3037 |
|
|
% like this:
|
| 3038 |
|
|
% @end defun
|
| 3039 |
|
|
% @tindex whatever
|
| 3040 |
|
|
% @defun ...
|
| 3041 |
|
|
% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
|
| 3042 |
|
|
% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
|
| 3043 |
|
|
% the previous defun.
|
| 3044 |
|
|
%
|
| 3045 |
|
|
% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
|
| 3046 |
|
|
% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
|
| 3047 |
|
|
%
|
| 3048 |
|
|
% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
|
| 3049 |
|
|
%
|
| 3050 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 3051 |
|
|
\ifvmode
|
| 3052 |
|
|
\skip0 = \lastskip
|
| 3053 |
|
|
\ifdim\lastskip = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip-\lastskip \fi
|
| 3054 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3055 |
|
|
%
|
| 3056 |
|
|
\temp % do the write
|
| 3057 |
|
|
%
|
| 3058 |
|
|
%
|
| 3059 |
|
|
\ifvmode \ifdim\skip0 = 0pt \else \nobreak\vskip\skip0 \fi \fi
|
| 3060 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3061 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3062 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3063 |
|
|
\penalty\count255
|
| 3064 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3065 |
|
|
}
|
| 3066 |
|
|
|
| 3067 |
|
|
% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
|
| 3068 |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
|
| 3069 |
|
|
% or
|
| 3070 |
|
|
% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
|
| 3071 |
|
|
% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
|
| 3072 |
|
|
% containing these kinds of lines:
|
| 3073 |
|
|
% \initial {c}
|
| 3074 |
|
|
% before the first topic whose initial is c
|
| 3075 |
|
|
% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
|
| 3076 |
|
|
% for a topic that is used without subtopics
|
| 3077 |
|
|
% \primary {topic}
|
| 3078 |
|
|
% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
|
| 3079 |
|
|
% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
|
| 3080 |
|
|
% for each subtopic.
|
| 3081 |
|
|
|
| 3082 |
|
|
% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
|
| 3083 |
|
|
% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
|
| 3084 |
|
|
|
| 3085 |
|
|
\def\findex {\fnindex}
|
| 3086 |
|
|
\def\kindex {\kyindex}
|
| 3087 |
|
|
\def\cindex {\cpindex}
|
| 3088 |
|
|
\def\vindex {\vrindex}
|
| 3089 |
|
|
\def\tindex {\tpindex}
|
| 3090 |
|
|
\def\pindex {\pgindex}
|
| 3091 |
|
|
|
| 3092 |
|
|
\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
|
| 3093 |
|
|
{\obeylines %
|
| 3094 |
|
|
\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
|
| 3095 |
|
|
\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
|
| 3096 |
|
|
|
| 3097 |
|
|
% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
|
| 3098 |
|
|
|
| 3099 |
|
|
% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
|
| 3100 |
|
|
% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
|
| 3101 |
|
|
%
|
| 3102 |
|
|
\def\printindex{\parsearg\doprintindex}
|
| 3103 |
|
|
\def\doprintindex#1{\begingroup
|
| 3104 |
|
|
\dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
|
| 3105 |
|
|
%
|
| 3106 |
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
| 3107 |
|
|
\tolerance = 9500
|
| 3108 |
|
|
\indexbreaks
|
| 3109 |
|
|
%
|
| 3110 |
|
|
% See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
|
| 3111 |
|
|
% Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
|
| 3112 |
|
|
% \initial {@}
|
| 3113 |
|
|
% as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
|
| 3114 |
|
|
% (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
|
| 3115 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = 11
|
| 3116 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.#1s
|
| 3117 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
| 3118 |
|
|
% \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
|
| 3119 |
|
|
% and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
|
| 3120 |
|
|
% index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
|
| 3121 |
|
|
% there is some text.
|
| 3122 |
|
|
\putwordIndexNonexistent
|
| 3123 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3124 |
|
|
%
|
| 3125 |
|
|
% If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
|
| 3126 |
|
|
% false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
|
| 3127 |
|
|
% it can discover if there is anything in it.
|
| 3128 |
|
|
\read 1 to \temp
|
| 3129 |
|
|
\ifeof 1
|
| 3130 |
|
|
\putwordIndexIsEmpty
|
| 3131 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3132 |
|
|
% Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
|
| 3133 |
|
|
% character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
|
| 3134 |
|
|
% to make right now.
|
| 3135 |
|
|
\def\indexbackslash{\rawbackslashxx}%
|
| 3136 |
|
|
\catcode`\\ = 0
|
| 3137 |
|
|
\escapechar = `\\
|
| 3138 |
|
|
\begindoublecolumns
|
| 3139 |
|
|
\input \jobname.#1s
|
| 3140 |
|
|
\enddoublecolumns
|
| 3141 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3142 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3143 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 3144 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 3145 |
|
|
|
| 3146 |
|
|
% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
|
| 3147 |
|
|
% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
|
| 3148 |
|
|
|
| 3149 |
|
|
\def\initial#1{{%
|
| 3150 |
|
|
% Some minor font changes for the special characters.
|
| 3151 |
|
|
\let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
|
| 3152 |
|
|
%
|
| 3153 |
|
|
% Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
|
| 3154 |
|
|
\removelastskip
|
| 3155 |
|
|
%
|
| 3156 |
|
|
% We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
|
| 3157 |
|
|
\penalty -300
|
| 3158 |
|
|
%
|
| 3159 |
|
|
% Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
|
| 3160 |
|
|
% baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
|
| 3161 |
|
|
% to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
|
| 3162 |
|
|
% we need before each entry, but it's better.
|
| 3163 |
|
|
%
|
| 3164 |
|
|
% No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
|
| 3165 |
|
|
\vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
|
| 3166 |
|
|
\leftline{\secbf #1}%
|
| 3167 |
|
|
\vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
|
| 3168 |
|
|
%
|
| 3169 |
|
|
% Do our best not to break after the initial.
|
| 3170 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3171 |
|
|
}}
|
| 3172 |
|
|
|
| 3173 |
|
|
% This typesets a paragraph consisting of #1, dot leaders, and then #2
|
| 3174 |
|
|
% flush to the right margin. It is used for index and table of contents
|
| 3175 |
|
|
% entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
|
| 3176 |
|
|
%
|
| 3177 |
|
|
\def\entry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 3178 |
|
|
%
|
| 3179 |
|
|
% Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
|
| 3180 |
|
|
% affect previous text.
|
| 3181 |
|
|
\par
|
| 3182 |
|
|
%
|
| 3183 |
|
|
% Do not fill out the last line with white space.
|
| 3184 |
|
|
\parfillskip = 0in
|
| 3185 |
|
|
%
|
| 3186 |
|
|
% No extra space above this paragraph.
|
| 3187 |
|
|
\parskip = 0in
|
| 3188 |
|
|
%
|
| 3189 |
|
|
% Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
|
| 3190 |
|
|
\finalhyphendemerits = 0
|
| 3191 |
|
|
%
|
| 3192 |
|
|
% \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
|
| 3193 |
|
|
% don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
|
| 3194 |
|
|
% dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
|
| 3195 |
|
|
% indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
|
| 3196 |
|
|
% lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
|
| 3197 |
|
|
%
|
| 3198 |
|
|
% \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
|
| 3199 |
|
|
% of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
|
| 3200 |
|
|
\hangindent = 2em
|
| 3201 |
|
|
%
|
| 3202 |
|
|
% When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
|
| 3203 |
|
|
% with blank space.
|
| 3204 |
|
|
\rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
|
| 3205 |
|
|
%
|
| 3206 |
|
|
% A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing columns.
|
| 3207 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus1pt
|
| 3208 |
|
|
%
|
| 3209 |
|
|
% Start a ``paragraph'' for the index entry so the line breaking
|
| 3210 |
|
|
% parameters we've set above will have an effect.
|
| 3211 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 3212 |
|
|
%
|
| 3213 |
|
|
% Insert the text of the index entry. TeX will do line-breaking on it.
|
| 3214 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 3215 |
|
|
% The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
|
| 3216 |
|
|
% there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
|
| 3217 |
|
|
% cursed by a Unix daemon.
|
| 3218 |
|
|
\def\tempa{{\rm }}%
|
| 3219 |
|
|
\def\tempb{#2}%
|
| 3220 |
|
|
\edef\tempc{\tempa}%
|
| 3221 |
|
|
\edef\tempd{\tempb}%
|
| 3222 |
|
|
\ifx\tempc\tempd\ \else%
|
| 3223 |
|
|
%
|
| 3224 |
|
|
% If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
|
| 3225 |
|
|
% this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
|
| 3226 |
|
|
% fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
|
| 3227 |
|
|
\hfil\penalty50
|
| 3228 |
|
|
\null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
|
| 3229 |
|
|
%
|
| 3230 |
|
|
% The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
|
| 3231 |
|
|
% part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
|
| 3232 |
|
|
% \hbox ensues.
|
| 3233 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 3234 |
|
|
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
| 3235 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3236 |
|
|
\ #2% The page number ends the paragraph.
|
| 3237 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3238 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 3239 |
|
|
\par
|
| 3240 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 3241 |
|
|
|
| 3242 |
|
|
% Like \dotfill except takes at least 1 em.
|
| 3243 |
|
|
\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
|
| 3244 |
|
|
\hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu ${\it .}$ \mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
|
| 3245 |
|
|
|
| 3246 |
|
|
\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
|
| 3247 |
|
|
|
| 3248 |
|
|
\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
|
| 3249 |
|
|
\def\secondary#1#2{{%
|
| 3250 |
|
|
\parfillskip=0in
|
| 3251 |
|
|
\parskip=0in
|
| 3252 |
|
|
\hangindent=1in
|
| 3253 |
|
|
\hangafter=1
|
| 3254 |
|
|
\noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
|
| 3255 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 3256 |
|
|
\pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
|
| 3257 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3258 |
|
|
#2
|
| 3259 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3260 |
|
|
\par
|
| 3261 |
|
|
}}
|
| 3262 |
|
|
|
| 3263 |
|
|
% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
|
| 3264 |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
|
| 3265 |
|
|
% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
|
| 3266 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=11
|
| 3267 |
|
|
|
| 3268 |
|
|
\newbox\partialpage
|
| 3269 |
|
|
\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
|
| 3270 |
|
|
|
| 3271 |
|
|
\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
|
| 3272 |
|
|
% Grab any single-column material above us.
|
| 3273 |
|
|
\output = {%
|
| 3274 |
|
|
%
|
| 3275 |
|
|
% Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
|
| 3276 |
|
|
% whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
|
| 3277 |
|
|
% routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
|
| 3278 |
|
|
% essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
|
| 3279 |
|
|
% that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
|
| 3280 |
|
|
% output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
|
| 3281 |
|
|
% runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
|
| 3282 |
|
|
\ifvoid\partialpage \else
|
| 3283 |
|
|
\onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
|
| 3284 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3285 |
|
|
%
|
| 3286 |
|
|
\global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
|
| 3287 |
|
|
% Unvbox the main output page.
|
| 3288 |
|
|
\unvbox\PAGE
|
| 3289 |
|
|
\kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
|
| 3290 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3291 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3292 |
|
|
\eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
|
| 3293 |
|
|
%
|
| 3294 |
|
|
% Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
|
| 3295 |
|
|
\output = {\doublecolumnout}%
|
| 3296 |
|
|
%
|
| 3297 |
|
|
% Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
|
| 3298 |
|
|
% routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
|
| 3299 |
|
|
% format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
|
| 3300 |
|
|
% of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
|
| 3301 |
|
|
% execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
|
| 3302 |
|
|
%
|
| 3303 |
|
|
% First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
|
| 3304 |
|
|
% the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
|
| 3305 |
|
|
% changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
|
| 3306 |
|
|
% below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
|
| 3307 |
|
|
% as it did when we hard-coded it.
|
| 3308 |
|
|
%
|
| 3309 |
|
|
% We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
|
| 3310 |
|
|
% can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
|
| 3311 |
|
|
% been clobbered.
|
| 3312 |
|
|
%
|
| 3313 |
|
|
\doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
|
| 3314 |
|
|
\advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
|
| 3315 |
|
|
\divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
|
| 3316 |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
| 3317 |
|
|
%
|
| 3318 |
|
|
% Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
|
| 3319 |
|
|
% since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
|
| 3320 |
|
|
\vsize = 2\vsize
|
| 3321 |
|
|
}
|
| 3322 |
|
|
|
| 3323 |
|
|
% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
|
| 3324 |
|
|
% the last.
|
| 3325 |
|
|
%
|
| 3326 |
|
|
\def\doublecolumnout{%
|
| 3327 |
|
|
\splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
|
| 3328 |
|
|
% Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
|
| 3329 |
|
|
% (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
|
| 3330 |
|
|
% previous page.
|
| 3331 |
|
|
\dimen@ = \vsize
|
| 3332 |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2
|
| 3333 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
|
| 3334 |
|
|
%
|
| 3335 |
|
|
% box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
|
| 3336 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
|
| 3337 |
|
|
\onepageout\pagesofar
|
| 3338 |
|
|
\unvbox255
|
| 3339 |
|
|
\penalty\outputpenalty
|
| 3340 |
|
|
}
|
| 3341 |
|
|
%
|
| 3342 |
|
|
% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
|
| 3343 |
|
|
% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
|
| 3344 |
|
|
\def\pagesofar{%
|
| 3345 |
|
|
\unvbox\partialpage
|
| 3346 |
|
|
%
|
| 3347 |
|
|
\hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
|
| 3348 |
|
|
\wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
|
| 3349 |
|
|
\hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
|
| 3350 |
|
|
}
|
| 3351 |
|
|
%
|
| 3352 |
|
|
% All done with double columns.
|
| 3353 |
|
|
\def\enddoublecolumns{%
|
| 3354 |
|
|
\output = {%
|
| 3355 |
|
|
% Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
|
| 3356 |
|
|
% current page, no automatic page break.
|
| 3357 |
|
|
\balancecolumns
|
| 3358 |
|
|
%
|
| 3359 |
|
|
% If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
|
| 3360 |
|
|
% though, there will be another page break right after this \output
|
| 3361 |
|
|
% invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
|
| 3362 |
|
|
% want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
|
| 3363 |
|
|
% definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
|
| 3364 |
|
|
% called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
|
| 3365 |
|
|
% the output somewhat more palatable.)
|
| 3366 |
|
|
\global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
|
| 3367 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3368 |
|
|
\eject
|
| 3369 |
|
|
\endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
|
| 3370 |
|
|
%
|
| 3371 |
|
|
% \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
|
| 3372 |
|
|
% the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
|
| 3373 |
|
|
% typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
|
| 3374 |
|
|
% \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
|
| 3375 |
|
|
\pagegoal = \vsize
|
| 3376 |
|
|
}
|
| 3377 |
|
|
%
|
| 3378 |
|
|
% Called at the end of the double column material.
|
| 3379 |
|
|
\def\balancecolumns{%
|
| 3380 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
|
| 3381 |
|
|
\dimen@ = \ht0
|
| 3382 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by \topskip
|
| 3383 |
|
|
\advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
|
| 3384 |
|
|
\divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
|
| 3385 |
|
|
%debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen@.}%
|
| 3386 |
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
| 3387 |
|
|
% Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
|
| 3388 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3389 |
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
| 3390 |
|
|
\loop
|
| 3391 |
|
|
\global\setbox3 = \copy0
|
| 3392 |
|
|
\global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
|
| 3393 |
|
|
\ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
|
| 3394 |
|
|
\global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
|
| 3395 |
|
|
\repeat
|
| 3396 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3397 |
|
|
%debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
|
| 3398 |
|
|
\setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
|
| 3399 |
|
|
\setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
|
| 3400 |
|
|
%
|
| 3401 |
|
|
\pagesofar
|
| 3402 |
|
|
}
|
| 3403 |
|
|
\catcode`\@ = \other
|
| 3404 |
|
|
|
| 3405 |
|
|
|
| 3406 |
|
|
\message{sectioning,}
|
| 3407 |
|
|
% Chapters, sections, etc.
|
| 3408 |
|
|
|
| 3409 |
|
|
\newcount\chapno
|
| 3410 |
|
|
\newcount\secno \secno=0
|
| 3411 |
|
|
\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
|
| 3412 |
|
|
\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
|
| 3413 |
|
|
|
| 3414 |
|
|
% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
|
| 3415 |
|
|
\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
|
| 3416 |
|
|
% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
|
| 3417 |
|
|
% We do the following for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
|
| 3418 |
|
|
% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
|
| 3419 |
|
|
\def\appendixletter{%
|
| 3420 |
|
|
\ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
|
| 3421 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
|
| 3422 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
|
| 3423 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
|
| 3424 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
|
| 3425 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
|
| 3426 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
|
| 3427 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
|
| 3428 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
|
| 3429 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
|
| 3430 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
|
| 3431 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
|
| 3432 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
|
| 3433 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
|
| 3434 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
|
| 3435 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
|
| 3436 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
|
| 3437 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
|
| 3438 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
|
| 3439 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
|
| 3440 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
|
| 3441 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
|
| 3442 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
|
| 3443 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
|
| 3444 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
|
| 3445 |
|
|
\else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
|
| 3446 |
|
|
% The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
|
| 3447 |
|
|
% expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
|
| 3448 |
|
|
% expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
|
| 3449 |
|
|
% with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
|
| 3450 |
|
|
\else\char\the\appendixno
|
| 3451 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
|
| 3452 |
|
|
\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
|
| 3453 |
|
|
|
| 3454 |
|
|
% Each @chapter defines this as the name of the chapter.
|
| 3455 |
|
|
% page headings and footings can use it. @section does likewise.
|
| 3456 |
|
|
\def\thischapter{}
|
| 3457 |
|
|
\def\thissection{}
|
| 3458 |
|
|
|
| 3459 |
|
|
\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
|
| 3460 |
|
|
\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raise/lowersections modify this count
|
| 3461 |
|
|
|
| 3462 |
|
|
% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
|
| 3463 |
|
|
\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
|
| 3464 |
|
|
\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
|
| 3465 |
|
|
|
| 3466 |
|
|
% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
|
| 3467 |
|
|
\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
|
| 3468 |
|
|
\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
|
| 3469 |
|
|
|
| 3470 |
|
|
% Choose a numbered-heading macro
|
| 3471 |
|
|
% #1 is heading level if unmodified by @raisesections or @lowersections
|
| 3472 |
|
|
% #2 is text for heading
|
| 3473 |
|
|
\def\numhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
| 3474 |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
| 3475 |
|
|
\chapterzzz{#2}
|
| 3476 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3477 |
|
|
\seczzz{#2}
|
| 3478 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3479 |
|
|
\numberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3480 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3481 |
|
|
\numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3482 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3483 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
| 3484 |
|
|
\chapterzzz{#2}
|
| 3485 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3486 |
|
|
\numberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3487 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3488 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3489 |
|
|
}
|
| 3490 |
|
|
|
| 3491 |
|
|
% like \numhead, but chooses appendix heading levels
|
| 3492 |
|
|
\def\apphead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
| 3493 |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
| 3494 |
|
|
\appendixzzz{#2}
|
| 3495 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3496 |
|
|
\appendixsectionzzz{#2}
|
| 3497 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3498 |
|
|
\appendixsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3499 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3500 |
|
|
\appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3501 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3502 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
| 3503 |
|
|
\appendixzzz{#2}
|
| 3504 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3505 |
|
|
\appendixsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3506 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3507 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3508 |
|
|
}
|
| 3509 |
|
|
|
| 3510 |
|
|
% like \numhead, but chooses numberless heading levels
|
| 3511 |
|
|
\def\unnmhead#1#2{\absseclevel=\secbase\advance\absseclevel by #1
|
| 3512 |
|
|
\ifcase\absseclevel
|
| 3513 |
|
|
\unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
| 3514 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3515 |
|
|
\unnumberedseczzz{#2}
|
| 3516 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3517 |
|
|
\unnumberedsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3518 |
|
|
\or
|
| 3519 |
|
|
\unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3520 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3521 |
|
|
\ifnum \absseclevel<0
|
| 3522 |
|
|
\unnumberedzzz{#2}
|
| 3523 |
|
|
\else
|
| 3524 |
|
|
\unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#2}
|
| 3525 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3526 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3527 |
|
|
}
|
| 3528 |
|
|
|
| 3529 |
|
|
% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.
|
| 3530 |
|
|
\def\thischaptername{No Chapter Title}
|
| 3531 |
|
|
\outer\def\chapter{\parsearg\chapteryyy}
|
| 3532 |
|
|
\def\chapteryyy #1{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
|
| 3533 |
|
|
\def\chapterzzz #1{%
|
| 3534 |
|
|
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
| 3535 |
|
|
\global\advance \chapno by 1 \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
|
| 3536 |
|
|
\chapmacro {#1}{\the\chapno}%
|
| 3537 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
| 3538 |
|
|
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
| 3539 |
|
|
% We don't substitute the actual chapter name into \thischapter
|
| 3540 |
|
|
% because we don't want its macros evaluated now.
|
| 3541 |
|
|
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \the\chapno: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
| 3542 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3543 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash chapentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3544 |
|
|
{\the\chapno}}}%
|
| 3545 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3546 |
|
|
\donoderef
|
| 3547 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
| 3548 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
| 3549 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
| 3550 |
|
|
}
|
| 3551 |
|
|
|
| 3552 |
|
|
\outer\def\appendix{\parsearg\appendixyyy}
|
| 3553 |
|
|
\def\appendixyyy #1{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
|
| 3554 |
|
|
\def\appendixzzz #1{%
|
| 3555 |
|
|
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
| 3556 |
|
|
\global\advance \appendixno by 1
|
| 3557 |
|
|
\message{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
|
| 3558 |
|
|
\chapmacro {#1}{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter}%
|
| 3559 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
| 3560 |
|
|
\gdef\thischaptername{#1}%
|
| 3561 |
|
|
\xdef\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \appendixletter: \noexpand\thischaptername}%
|
| 3562 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3563 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash appendixentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3564 |
|
|
{\appendixletter}}}%
|
| 3565 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3566 |
|
|
\appendixnoderef
|
| 3567 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \appendixsec
|
| 3568 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
|
| 3569 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
|
| 3570 |
|
|
}
|
| 3571 |
|
|
|
| 3572 |
|
|
% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
|
| 3573 |
|
|
\outer\def\centerchap{\parsearg\centerchapyyy}
|
| 3574 |
|
|
\def\centerchapyyy #1{{\let\unnumbchapmacro=\centerchapmacro \unnumberedyyy{#1}}}
|
| 3575 |
|
|
|
| 3576 |
|
|
% @top is like @unnumbered.
|
| 3577 |
|
|
\outer\def\top{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
| 3578 |
|
|
|
| 3579 |
|
|
\outer\def\unnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedyyy}
|
| 3580 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedyyy #1{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
|
| 3581 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedzzz #1{%
|
| 3582 |
|
|
\secno=0 \subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0
|
| 3583 |
|
|
%
|
| 3584 |
|
|
% This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
|
| 3585 |
|
|
% argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
|
| 3586 |
|
|
% expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
|
| 3587 |
|
|
% expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
|
| 3588 |
|
|
% to be executed, not expanded).
|
| 3589 |
|
|
%
|
| 3590 |
|
|
% Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
|
| 3591 |
|
|
% as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
|
| 3592 |
|
|
% \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
|
| 3593 |
|
|
% simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
|
| 3594 |
|
|
% the toc entries.)
|
| 3595 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}\message{(\the\toks0)}%
|
| 3596 |
|
|
%
|
| 3597 |
|
|
\unnumbchapmacro {#1}%
|
| 3598 |
|
|
\gdef\thischapter{#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
| 3599 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3600 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbchapentry{\the\toks0}}}%
|
| 3601 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3602 |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef
|
| 3603 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
|
| 3604 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
|
| 3605 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
|
| 3606 |
|
|
}
|
| 3607 |
|
|
|
| 3608 |
|
|
% Sections.
|
| 3609 |
|
|
\outer\def\numberedsec{\parsearg\secyyy}
|
| 3610 |
|
|
\def\secyyy #1{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
|
| 3611 |
|
|
\def\seczzz #1{%
|
| 3612 |
|
|
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
| 3613 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}%
|
| 3614 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3615 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3616 |
|
|
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
|
| 3617 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3618 |
|
|
\donoderef
|
| 3619 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3620 |
|
|
}
|
| 3621 |
|
|
|
| 3622 |
|
|
\outer\def\appendixsection{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
| 3623 |
|
|
\outer\def\appendixsec{\parsearg\appendixsecyyy}
|
| 3624 |
|
|
\def\appendixsecyyy #1{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
|
| 3625 |
|
|
\def\appendixsectionzzz #1{%
|
| 3626 |
|
|
\subsecno=0 \subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \secno by 1 %
|
| 3627 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\secheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}%
|
| 3628 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3629 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash secentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3630 |
|
|
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}}}%
|
| 3631 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3632 |
|
|
\appendixnoderef
|
| 3633 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3634 |
|
|
}
|
| 3635 |
|
|
|
| 3636 |
|
|
\outer\def\unnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsecyyy}
|
| 3637 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsecyyy #1{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
|
| 3638 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedseczzz #1{%
|
| 3639 |
|
|
\plainsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
| 3640 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3641 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsecentry%
|
| 3642 |
|
|
{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}}}%
|
| 3643 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3644 |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef
|
| 3645 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3646 |
|
|
}
|
| 3647 |
|
|
|
| 3648 |
|
|
% Subsections.
|
| 3649 |
|
|
\outer\def\numberedsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsecyyy}
|
| 3650 |
|
|
\def\numberedsubsecyyy #1{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
|
| 3651 |
|
|
\def\numberedsubseczzz #1{%
|
| 3652 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
| 3653 |
|
|
\subsecheading {#1}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
| 3654 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3655 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3656 |
|
|
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
| 3657 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3658 |
|
|
\donoderef
|
| 3659 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3660 |
|
|
}
|
| 3661 |
|
|
|
| 3662 |
|
|
\outer\def\appendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsecyyy}
|
| 3663 |
|
|
\def\appendixsubsecyyy #1{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
|
| 3664 |
|
|
\def\appendixsubseczzz #1{%
|
| 3665 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance \subsecno by 1 %
|
| 3666 |
|
|
\subsecheading {#1}{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}%
|
| 3667 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3668 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3669 |
|
|
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
| 3670 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3671 |
|
|
\appendixnoderef
|
| 3672 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3673 |
|
|
}
|
| 3674 |
|
|
|
| 3675 |
|
|
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsecyyy}
|
| 3676 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
|
| 3677 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubseczzz #1{%
|
| 3678 |
|
|
\plainsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
| 3679 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3680 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsecentry%
|
| 3681 |
|
|
{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}}}%
|
| 3682 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3683 |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef
|
| 3684 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3685 |
|
|
}
|
| 3686 |
|
|
|
| 3687 |
|
|
% Subsubsections.
|
| 3688 |
|
|
\outer\def\numberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\numberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
| 3689 |
|
|
\def\numberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
|
| 3690 |
|
|
\def\numberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
| 3691 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
| 3692 |
|
|
\subsubsecheading {#1}
|
| 3693 |
|
|
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| 3694 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3695 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3696 |
|
|
{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
|
| 3697 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3698 |
|
|
\donoderef
|
| 3699 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3700 |
|
|
}
|
| 3701 |
|
|
|
| 3702 |
|
|
\outer\def\appendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubsecyyy}
|
| 3703 |
|
|
\def\appendixsubsubsecyyy #1{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
|
| 3704 |
|
|
\def\appendixsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
| 3705 |
|
|
\gdef\thissection{#1}\global\advance \subsubsecno by 1 %
|
| 3706 |
|
|
\subsubsecheading {#1}
|
| 3707 |
|
|
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}%
|
| 3708 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3709 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash subsubsecentry{\the\toks0}%
|
| 3710 |
|
|
{\appendixletter}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}{\the\subsubsecno}}}%
|
| 3711 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3712 |
|
|
\appendixnoderef
|
| 3713 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3714 |
|
|
}
|
| 3715 |
|
|
|
| 3716 |
|
|
\outer\def\unnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy}
|
| 3717 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsubsecyyy #1{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
|
| 3718 |
|
|
\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz #1{%
|
| 3719 |
|
|
\plainsubsubsecheading {#1}\gdef\thissection{#1}%
|
| 3720 |
|
|
\toks0 = {#1}%
|
| 3721 |
|
|
\edef\temp{\noexpand\writetocentry{\realbackslash unnumbsubsubsecentry%
|
| 3722 |
|
|
{\the\toks0}{\the\chapno}{\the\secno}{\the\subsecno}}}%
|
| 3723 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 3724 |
|
|
\unnumbnoderef
|
| 3725 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3726 |
|
|
}
|
| 3727 |
|
|
|
| 3728 |
|
|
% These are variants which are not "outer", so they can appear in @ifinfo.
|
| 3729 |
|
|
% Actually, they should now be obsolete; ordinary section commands should work.
|
| 3730 |
|
|
\def\infotop{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
| 3731 |
|
|
\def\infounnumbered{\parsearg\unnumberedzzz}
|
| 3732 |
|
|
\def\infounnumberedsec{\parsearg\unnumberedseczzz}
|
| 3733 |
|
|
\def\infounnumberedsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubseczzz}
|
| 3734 |
|
|
\def\infounnumberedsubsubsec{\parsearg\unnumberedsubsubseczzz}
|
| 3735 |
|
|
|
| 3736 |
|
|
\def\infoappendix{\parsearg\appendixzzz}
|
| 3737 |
|
|
\def\infoappendixsec{\parsearg\appendixseczzz}
|
| 3738 |
|
|
\def\infoappendixsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubseczzz}
|
| 3739 |
|
|
\def\infoappendixsubsubsec{\parsearg\appendixsubsubseczzz}
|
| 3740 |
|
|
|
| 3741 |
|
|
\def\infochapter{\parsearg\chapterzzz}
|
| 3742 |
|
|
\def\infosection{\parsearg\sectionzzz}
|
| 3743 |
|
|
\def\infosubsection{\parsearg\subsectionzzz}
|
| 3744 |
|
|
\def\infosubsubsection{\parsearg\subsubsectionzzz}
|
| 3745 |
|
|
|
| 3746 |
|
|
% These macros control what the section commands do, according
|
| 3747 |
|
|
% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
|
| 3748 |
|
|
% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
|
| 3749 |
|
|
\global\let\section = \numberedsec
|
| 3750 |
|
|
\global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
|
| 3751 |
|
|
\global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
|
| 3752 |
|
|
|
| 3753 |
|
|
% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
|
| 3754 |
|
|
|
| 3755 |
|
|
% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
|
| 3756 |
|
|
% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
|
| 3757 |
|
|
% overlong headings to fold.
|
| 3758 |
|
|
% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
|
| 3759 |
|
|
% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
|
| 3760 |
|
|
% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
|
| 3761 |
|
|
% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
|
| 3762 |
|
|
|
| 3763 |
|
|
|
| 3764 |
|
|
\def\majorheading{\parsearg\majorheadingzzz}
|
| 3765 |
|
|
\def\majorheadingzzz #1{%
|
| 3766 |
|
|
{\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
|
| 3767 |
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 3768 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
| 3769 |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
| 3770 |
|
|
|
| 3771 |
|
|
\def\chapheading{\parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
|
| 3772 |
|
|
\def\chapheadingzzz #1{\chapbreak %
|
| 3773 |
|
|
{\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 3774 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
| 3775 |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\penalty 200}
|
| 3776 |
|
|
|
| 3777 |
|
|
% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
|
| 3778 |
|
|
\def\heading{\parsearg\plainsecheading}
|
| 3779 |
|
|
\def\subheading{\parsearg\plainsubsecheading}
|
| 3780 |
|
|
\def\subsubheading{\parsearg\plainsubsubsecheading}
|
| 3781 |
|
|
|
| 3782 |
|
|
% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
|
| 3783 |
|
|
% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
|
| 3784 |
|
|
% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
|
| 3785 |
|
|
|
| 3786 |
|
|
%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
|
| 3787 |
|
|
\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
|
| 3788 |
|
|
|
| 3789 |
|
|
\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
|
| 3790 |
|
|
|
| 3791 |
|
|
%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
|
| 3792 |
|
|
% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
|
| 3793 |
|
|
|
| 3794 |
|
|
\newskip\chapheadingskip
|
| 3795 |
|
|
|
| 3796 |
|
|
\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
|
| 3797 |
|
|
\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
|
| 3798 |
|
|
\def\chapoddpage{\chappager \ifodd\pageno \else \hbox to 0pt{} \chappager\fi}
|
| 3799 |
|
|
|
| 3800 |
|
|
\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
|
| 3801 |
|
|
|
| 3802 |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
|
| 3803 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 3804 |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
|
| 3805 |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
|
| 3806 |
|
|
|
| 3807 |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGon{%
|
| 3808 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
|
| 3809 |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
|
| 3810 |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
|
| 3811 |
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
|
| 3812 |
|
|
|
| 3813 |
|
|
\def\CHAPPAGodd{
|
| 3814 |
|
|
\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
|
| 3815 |
|
|
\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
|
| 3816 |
|
|
\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
|
| 3817 |
|
|
\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
|
| 3818 |
|
|
|
| 3819 |
|
|
\CHAPPAGon
|
| 3820 |
|
|
|
| 3821 |
|
|
\def\CHAPFplain{
|
| 3822 |
|
|
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfplain
|
| 3823 |
|
|
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfplain
|
| 3824 |
|
|
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfplain}
|
| 3825 |
|
|
|
| 3826 |
|
|
% Plain chapter opening.
|
| 3827 |
|
|
% #1 is the text, #2 the chapter number or empty if unnumbered.
|
| 3828 |
|
|
\def\chfplain#1#2{%
|
| 3829 |
|
|
\pchapsepmacro
|
| 3830 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3831 |
|
|
\chapfonts \rm
|
| 3832 |
|
|
\def\chapnum{#2}%
|
| 3833 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\chapnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
| 3834 |
|
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
| 3835 |
|
|
\hangindent = \wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
|
| 3836 |
|
|
\unhbox0 #1\par}%
|
| 3837 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3838 |
|
|
\nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
|
| 3839 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 3840 |
|
|
}
|
| 3841 |
|
|
|
| 3842 |
|
|
% Plain opening for unnumbered.
|
| 3843 |
|
|
\def\unnchfplain#1{\chfplain{#1}{}}
|
| 3844 |
|
|
|
| 3845 |
|
|
% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
|
| 3846 |
|
|
\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
|
| 3847 |
|
|
\def\centerchfplain#1{{%
|
| 3848 |
|
|
\def\centerparametersmaybe{%
|
| 3849 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
|
| 3850 |
|
|
\leftskip = \rightskip
|
| 3851 |
|
|
\parfillskip = 0pt
|
| 3852 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3853 |
|
|
\chfplain{#1}{}%
|
| 3854 |
|
|
}}
|
| 3855 |
|
|
|
| 3856 |
|
|
\CHAPFplain % The default
|
| 3857 |
|
|
|
| 3858 |
|
|
\def\unnchfopen #1{%
|
| 3859 |
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 3860 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt\raggedright
|
| 3861 |
|
|
\rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
| 3862 |
|
|
}
|
| 3863 |
|
|
|
| 3864 |
|
|
\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
|
| 3865 |
|
|
\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
|
| 3866 |
|
|
\par\penalty 5000 %
|
| 3867 |
|
|
}
|
| 3868 |
|
|
|
| 3869 |
|
|
\def\centerchfopen #1{%
|
| 3870 |
|
|
\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
|
| 3871 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
| 3872 |
|
|
\hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
|
| 3873 |
|
|
}
|
| 3874 |
|
|
|
| 3875 |
|
|
\def\CHAPFopen{
|
| 3876 |
|
|
\global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
|
| 3877 |
|
|
\global\let\unnumbchapmacro=\unnchfopen
|
| 3878 |
|
|
\global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
|
| 3879 |
|
|
|
| 3880 |
|
|
|
| 3881 |
|
|
% Section titles.
|
| 3882 |
|
|
\newskip\secheadingskip
|
| 3883 |
|
|
\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip {-1000}}
|
| 3884 |
|
|
\def\secheading#1#2#3{\sectionheading{sec}{#2.#3}{#1}}
|
| 3885 |
|
|
\def\plainsecheading#1{\sectionheading{sec}{}{#1}}
|
| 3886 |
|
|
|
| 3887 |
|
|
% Subsection titles.
|
| 3888 |
|
|
\newskip \subsecheadingskip
|
| 3889 |
|
|
\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip {-500}}
|
| 3890 |
|
|
\def\subsecheading#1#2#3#4{\sectionheading{subsec}{#2.#3.#4}{#1}}
|
| 3891 |
|
|
\def\plainsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsec}{}{#1}}
|
| 3892 |
|
|
|
| 3893 |
|
|
% Subsubsection titles.
|
| 3894 |
|
|
\let\subsubsecheadingskip = \subsecheadingskip
|
| 3895 |
|
|
\let\subsubsecheadingbreak = \subsecheadingbreak
|
| 3896 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecheading#1#2#3#4#5{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{#2.#3.#4.#5}{#1}}
|
| 3897 |
|
|
\def\plainsubsubsecheading#1{\sectionheading{subsubsec}{}{#1}}
|
| 3898 |
|
|
|
| 3899 |
|
|
|
| 3900 |
|
|
% Print any size section title.
|
| 3901 |
|
|
%
|
| 3902 |
|
|
% #1 is the section type (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #2 is the section
|
| 3903 |
|
|
% number (maybe empty), #3 the text.
|
| 3904 |
|
|
\def\sectionheading#1#2#3{%
|
| 3905 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3906 |
|
|
\expandafter\advance\csname #1headingskip\endcsname by \parskip
|
| 3907 |
|
|
\csname #1headingbreak\endcsname
|
| 3908 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3909 |
|
|
{%
|
| 3910 |
|
|
% Switch to the right set of fonts.
|
| 3911 |
|
|
\csname #1fonts\endcsname \rm
|
| 3912 |
|
|
%
|
| 3913 |
|
|
% Only insert the separating space if we have a section number.
|
| 3914 |
|
|
\def\secnum{#2}%
|
| 3915 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{#2\ifx\secnum\empty\else\enspace\fi}%
|
| 3916 |
|
|
%
|
| 3917 |
|
|
\vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
|
| 3918 |
|
|
\hangindent = \wd0 % zero if no section number
|
| 3919 |
|
|
\unhbox0 #3}%
|
| 3920 |
|
|
}%
|
| 3921 |
|
|
\ifdim\parskip<10pt \nobreak\kern10pt\nobreak\kern-\parskip\fi \nobreak
|
| 3922 |
|
|
}
|
| 3923 |
|
|
|
| 3924 |
|
|
|
| 3925 |
|
|
\message{toc,}
|
| 3926 |
|
|
% Table of contents.
|
| 3927 |
|
|
\newwrite\tocfile
|
| 3928 |
|
|
|
| 3929 |
|
|
% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
|
| 3930 |
|
|
% Called from @chapter, etc. We supply {\folio} at the end of the
|
| 3931 |
|
|
% argument, which will end up as the last argument to the \...entry macro.
|
| 3932 |
|
|
%
|
| 3933 |
|
|
% We open the .toc file here instead of at @setfilename or any other
|
| 3934 |
|
|
% fixed time so that @contents can be put in the document anywhere.
|
| 3935 |
|
|
%
|
| 3936 |
|
|
\newif\iftocfileopened
|
| 3937 |
|
|
\def\writetocentry#1{%
|
| 3938 |
|
|
\iftocfileopened\else
|
| 3939 |
|
|
\immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
|
| 3940 |
|
|
\global\tocfileopenedtrue
|
| 3941 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3942 |
|
|
\iflinks \write\tocfile{#1{\folio}}\fi
|
| 3943 |
|
|
%
|
| 3944 |
|
|
% Tell \shipout to create a page destination if we're doing pdf, which
|
| 3945 |
|
|
% will be the target of the links in the table of contents. We can't
|
| 3946 |
|
|
% just do it on every page because the title pages are numbered 1 and
|
| 3947 |
|
|
% 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first two pages
|
| 3948 |
|
|
% of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named `1', and
|
| 3949 |
|
|
% two named `2'.
|
| 3950 |
|
|
\ifpdf \pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
|
| 3951 |
|
|
}
|
| 3952 |
|
|
|
| 3953 |
|
|
\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
|
| 3954 |
|
|
\newcount\savepageno
|
| 3955 |
|
|
\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
|
| 3956 |
|
|
|
| 3957 |
|
|
% Finish up the main text and prepare to read what we've written
|
| 3958 |
|
|
% to \tocfile.
|
| 3959 |
|
|
%
|
| 3960 |
|
|
\def\startcontents#1{%
|
| 3961 |
|
|
% If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
|
| 3962 |
|
|
% start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
|
| 3963 |
|
|
% \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
|
| 3964 |
|
|
% From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
|
| 3965 |
|
|
\contentsalignmacro
|
| 3966 |
|
|
\immediate\closeout\tocfile
|
| 3967 |
|
|
%
|
| 3968 |
|
|
% Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
|
| 3969 |
|
|
% It is abundantly clear what they are.
|
| 3970 |
|
|
\unnumbchapmacro{#1}\def\thischapter{}%
|
| 3971 |
|
|
\savepageno = \pageno
|
| 3972 |
|
|
\begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
|
| 3973 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=0 \catcode`\{=1 \catcode`\}=2 \catcode`\@=11
|
| 3974 |
|
|
% We can't do this, because then an actual ^ in a section
|
| 3975 |
|
|
% title fails, e.g., @chapter ^ -- exponentiation. --karl, 9jul97.
|
| 3976 |
|
|
%\catcode`\^=7 % to see ^^e4 as \"a etc. juha@piuha.ydi.vtt.fi
|
| 3977 |
|
|
\raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
|
| 3978 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
|
| 3979 |
|
|
%
|
| 3980 |
|
|
% Roman numerals for page numbers.
|
| 3981 |
|
|
\ifnum \pageno>0 \pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
|
| 3982 |
|
|
}
|
| 3983 |
|
|
|
| 3984 |
|
|
|
| 3985 |
|
|
% Normal (long) toc.
|
| 3986 |
|
|
\def\contents{%
|
| 3987 |
|
|
\startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
|
| 3988 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
| 3989 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 3990 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 3991 |
|
|
\input \jobname.toc
|
| 3992 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 3993 |
|
|
\vfill \eject
|
| 3994 |
|
|
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
| 3995 |
|
|
\pdfmakeoutlines
|
| 3996 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 3997 |
|
|
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
| 3998 |
|
|
\pageno = \savepageno
|
| 3999 |
|
|
}
|
| 4000 |
|
|
|
| 4001 |
|
|
% And just the chapters.
|
| 4002 |
|
|
\def\summarycontents{%
|
| 4003 |
|
|
\startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
|
| 4004 |
|
|
%
|
| 4005 |
|
|
\let\chapentry = \shortchapentry
|
| 4006 |
|
|
\let\appendixentry = \shortappendixentry
|
| 4007 |
|
|
\let\unnumbchapentry = \shortunnumberedentry
|
| 4008 |
|
|
% We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
|
| 4009 |
|
|
\secfonts
|
| 4010 |
|
|
\let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf \let\sl=\shortcontsl
|
| 4011 |
|
|
\rm
|
| 4012 |
|
|
\hyphenpenalty = 10000
|
| 4013 |
|
|
\advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
|
| 4014 |
|
|
\def\secentry ##1##2##3##4{}
|
| 4015 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsecentry ##1##2##3{}
|
| 4016 |
|
|
\def\subsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
|
| 4017 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4{}
|
| 4018 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5##6{}
|
| 4019 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry ##1##2##3##4##5{}
|
| 4020 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.toc
|
| 4021 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 4022 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 4023 |
|
|
\input \jobname.toc
|
| 4024 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4025 |
|
|
\vfill \eject
|
| 4026 |
|
|
\contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
|
| 4027 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4028 |
|
|
\lastnegativepageno = \pageno
|
| 4029 |
|
|
\pageno = \savepageno
|
| 4030 |
|
|
}
|
| 4031 |
|
|
\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
|
| 4032 |
|
|
|
| 4033 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 4034 |
|
|
\pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}%
|
| 4035 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4036 |
|
|
|
| 4037 |
|
|
% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
|
| 4038 |
|
|
% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
|
| 4039 |
|
|
% The last argument is the page number.
|
| 4040 |
|
|
% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
|
| 4041 |
|
|
|
| 4042 |
|
|
% Chapters, in the main contents.
|
| 4043 |
|
|
\def\chapentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
|
| 4044 |
|
|
%
|
| 4045 |
|
|
% Chapters, in the short toc.
|
| 4046 |
|
|
% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
|
| 4047 |
|
|
\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3{%
|
| 4048 |
|
|
\tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#3\egroup}%
|
| 4049 |
|
|
}
|
| 4050 |
|
|
|
| 4051 |
|
|
% Appendices, in the main contents.
|
| 4052 |
|
|
\def\appendixentry#1#2#3{\dochapentry{\putwordAppendix{} #2\labelspace#1}{#3}}
|
| 4053 |
|
|
%
|
| 4054 |
|
|
% Appendices, in the short toc.
|
| 4055 |
|
|
\let\shortappendixentry = \shortchapentry
|
| 4056 |
|
|
|
| 4057 |
|
|
% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
|
| 4058 |
|
|
% The arg is, e.g., `Appendix A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
|
| 4059 |
|
|
% We could simplify the code here by writing out an \appendixentry
|
| 4060 |
|
|
% command in the toc file for appendices, instead of using \chapentry
|
| 4061 |
|
|
% for both, but it doesn't seem worth it.
|
| 4062 |
|
|
%
|
| 4063 |
|
|
\newdimen\shortappendixwidth
|
| 4064 |
|
|
%
|
| 4065 |
|
|
\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
|
| 4066 |
|
|
% This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
|
| 4067 |
|
|
% widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
|
| 4068 |
|
|
% But use \hss just in case.
|
| 4069 |
|
|
% (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
|
| 4070 |
|
|
% the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
|
| 4071 |
|
|
\dimen0 = 1em
|
| 4072 |
|
|
\hbox to \dimen0{#1\hss}%
|
| 4073 |
|
|
}
|
| 4074 |
|
|
|
| 4075 |
|
|
% Unnumbered chapters.
|
| 4076 |
|
|
\def\unnumbchapentry#1#2{\dochapentry{#1}{#2}}
|
| 4077 |
|
|
\def\shortunnumberedentry#1#2{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#2\egroup}}
|
| 4078 |
|
|
|
| 4079 |
|
|
% Sections.
|
| 4080 |
|
|
\def\secentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2.#3\labelspace#1}{#4}}
|
| 4081 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsecentry#1#2#3{\dosecentry{#1}{#3}}
|
| 4082 |
|
|
|
| 4083 |
|
|
% Subsections.
|
| 4084 |
|
|
\def\subsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsecentry{#2.#3.#4\labelspace#1}{#5}}
|
| 4085 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
|
| 4086 |
|
|
|
| 4087 |
|
|
% And subsubsections.
|
| 4088 |
|
|
\def\subsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
| 4089 |
|
|
\dosubsubsecentry{#2.#3.#4.#5\labelspace#1}{#6}}
|
| 4090 |
|
|
\def\unnumbsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4#5{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#5}}
|
| 4091 |
|
|
|
| 4092 |
|
|
% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
|
| 4093 |
|
|
\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 3pc
|
| 4094 |
|
|
|
| 4095 |
|
|
% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
|
| 4096 |
|
|
% page number.
|
| 4097 |
|
|
%
|
| 4098 |
|
|
% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
|
| 4099 |
|
|
% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
|
| 4100 |
|
|
\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
|
| 4101 |
|
|
\penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
|
| 4102 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4103 |
|
|
\chapentryfonts
|
| 4104 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 4105 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4106 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
|
| 4107 |
|
|
}
|
| 4108 |
|
|
|
| 4109 |
|
|
\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 4110 |
|
|
\secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
|
| 4111 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 4112 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 4113 |
|
|
|
| 4114 |
|
|
\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 4115 |
|
|
\subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
|
| 4116 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 4117 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 4118 |
|
|
|
| 4119 |
|
|
\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 4120 |
|
|
\subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
|
| 4121 |
|
|
\tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
|
| 4122 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 4123 |
|
|
|
| 4124 |
|
|
% Final typesetting of a toc entry; we use the same \entry macro as for
|
| 4125 |
|
|
% the index entries, but we want to suppress hyphenation here. (We
|
| 4126 |
|
|
% can't do that in the \entry macro, since index entries might consist
|
| 4127 |
|
|
% of hyphenated-identifiers-that-do-not-fit-on-a-line-and-nothing-else.)
|
| 4128 |
|
|
\def\tocentry#1#2{\begingroup
|
| 4129 |
|
|
\vskip 0pt plus1pt % allow a little stretch for the sake of nice page breaks
|
| 4130 |
|
|
% Do not use \turnoffactive in these arguments. Since the toc is
|
| 4131 |
|
|
% typeset in cmr, characters such as _ would come out wrong; we
|
| 4132 |
|
|
% have to do the usual translation tricks.
|
| 4133 |
|
|
\entry{#1}{#2}%
|
| 4134 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 4135 |
|
|
|
| 4136 |
|
|
% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
|
| 4137 |
|
|
\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
|
| 4138 |
|
|
|
| 4139 |
|
|
\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
| 4140 |
|
|
\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
|
| 4141 |
|
|
|
| 4142 |
|
|
\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
|
| 4143 |
|
|
\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
|
| 4144 |
|
|
\let\subsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
| 4145 |
|
|
\let\subsubsecentryfonts = \textfonts
|
| 4146 |
|
|
|
| 4147 |
|
|
|
| 4148 |
|
|
\message{environments,}
|
| 4149 |
|
|
% @foo ... @end foo.
|
| 4150 |
|
|
|
| 4151 |
|
|
% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
|
| 4152 |
|
|
%
|
| 4153 |
|
|
% Since these characters are used in examples, it should be an even number of
|
| 4154 |
|
|
% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
|
| 4155 |
|
|
%
|
| 4156 |
|
|
\def\point{$\star$}
|
| 4157 |
|
|
\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.15ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
|
| 4158 |
|
|
\def\expansion{\leavevmode\raise.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
|
| 4159 |
|
|
\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
|
| 4160 |
|
|
\def\equiv{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
|
| 4161 |
|
|
|
| 4162 |
|
|
% The @error{} command.
|
| 4163 |
|
|
% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
|
| 4164 |
|
|
%
|
| 4165 |
|
|
\newbox\errorbox
|
| 4166 |
|
|
%
|
| 4167 |
|
|
{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
|
| 4168 |
|
|
\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
|
| 4169 |
|
|
% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
|
| 4170 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \tensf error\kern-1.5pt}
|
| 4171 |
|
|
%
|
| 4172 |
|
|
\global\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
|
| 4173 |
|
|
\hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
|
| 4174 |
|
|
\advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
|
| 4175 |
|
|
\vbox{
|
| 4176 |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2
|
| 4177 |
|
|
\hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
|
| 4178 |
|
|
\vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
|
| 4179 |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
|
| 4180 |
|
|
\hrule height\dimen2}
|
| 4181 |
|
|
\hfil}
|
| 4182 |
|
|
%
|
| 4183 |
|
|
\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
|
| 4184 |
|
|
|
| 4185 |
|
|
% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
|
| 4186 |
|
|
% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
|
| 4187 |
|
|
% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
|
| 4188 |
|
|
|
| 4189 |
|
|
\def\tex{\begingroup
|
| 4190 |
|
|
\catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
|
| 4191 |
|
|
\catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
|
| 4192 |
|
|
\catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=13 \let~=\tie
|
| 4193 |
|
|
\catcode `\%=14
|
| 4194 |
|
|
\catcode 43=12 % plus
|
| 4195 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=12
|
| 4196 |
|
|
\catcode`\==12
|
| 4197 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=12
|
| 4198 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=12
|
| 4199 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=12
|
| 4200 |
|
|
\escapechar=`\\
|
| 4201 |
|
|
%
|
| 4202 |
|
|
\let\b=\ptexb
|
| 4203 |
|
|
\let\bullet=\ptexbullet
|
| 4204 |
|
|
\let\c=\ptexc
|
| 4205 |
|
|
\let\,=\ptexcomma
|
| 4206 |
|
|
\let\.=\ptexdot
|
| 4207 |
|
|
\let\dots=\ptexdots
|
| 4208 |
|
|
\let\equiv=\ptexequiv
|
| 4209 |
|
|
\let\!=\ptexexclam
|
| 4210 |
|
|
\let\i=\ptexi
|
| 4211 |
|
|
\let\{=\ptexlbrace
|
| 4212 |
|
|
\let\+=\tabalign
|
| 4213 |
|
|
\let\}=\ptexrbrace
|
| 4214 |
|
|
\let\*=\ptexstar
|
| 4215 |
|
|
\let\t=\ptext
|
| 4216 |
|
|
%
|
| 4217 |
|
|
\def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
|
| 4218 |
|
|
\def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
|
| 4219 |
|
|
\def\@{@}%
|
| 4220 |
|
|
\let\Etex=\endgroup}
|
| 4221 |
|
|
|
| 4222 |
|
|
% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
|
| 4223 |
|
|
% @lisp does a \begingroup so it can rebind things,
|
| 4224 |
|
|
% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
|
| 4225 |
|
|
|
| 4226 |
|
|
% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
|
| 4227 |
|
|
\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
|
| 4228 |
|
|
|
| 4229 |
|
|
% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
|
| 4230 |
|
|
% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
|
| 4231 |
|
|
% have any width.
|
| 4232 |
|
|
\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
|
| 4233 |
|
|
|
| 4234 |
|
|
% Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
|
| 4235 |
|
|
% space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
|
| 4236 |
|
|
% is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
|
| 4237 |
|
|
% should produce a line of output anyway.
|
| 4238 |
|
|
%
|
| 4239 |
|
|
{\obeyspaces %
|
| 4240 |
|
|
\gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}}
|
| 4241 |
|
|
|
| 4242 |
|
|
% Define \obeyedspace to be our active space, whatever it is. This is
|
| 4243 |
|
|
% for use in \parsearg.
|
| 4244 |
|
|
{\sepspaces%
|
| 4245 |
|
|
\global\let\obeyedspace= }
|
| 4246 |
|
|
|
| 4247 |
|
|
% This space is always present above and below environments.
|
| 4248 |
|
|
\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
|
| 4249 |
|
|
|
| 4250 |
|
|
% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
|
| 4251 |
|
|
% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
|
| 4252 |
|
|
% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
|
| 4253 |
|
|
% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip
|
| 4254 |
|
|
%
|
| 4255 |
|
|
\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
|
| 4256 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty < 10000
|
| 4257 |
|
|
\advance\envskipamount by \parskip
|
| 4258 |
|
|
\endgraf
|
| 4259 |
|
|
\ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
|
| 4260 |
|
|
\removelastskip
|
| 4261 |
|
|
\penalty-50
|
| 4262 |
|
|
\vskip\envskipamount
|
| 4263 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4264 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4265 |
|
|
}}
|
| 4266 |
|
|
|
| 4267 |
|
|
\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
|
| 4268 |
|
|
|
| 4269 |
|
|
% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins.
|
| 4270 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
| 4271 |
|
|
|
| 4272 |
|
|
% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
|
| 4273 |
|
|
% environment contents.
|
| 4274 |
|
|
\font\circle=lcircle10
|
| 4275 |
|
|
\newdimen\circthick
|
| 4276 |
|
|
\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
|
| 4277 |
|
|
\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
|
| 4278 |
|
|
\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
|
| 4279 |
|
|
%
|
| 4280 |
|
|
\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
|
| 4281 |
|
|
\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
|
| 4282 |
|
|
\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
|
| 4283 |
|
|
\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
|
| 4284 |
|
|
\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
| 4285 |
|
|
\ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
|
| 4286 |
|
|
\hskip\rskip}}
|
| 4287 |
|
|
\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
|
| 4288 |
|
|
\cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
|
| 4289 |
|
|
\hskip\rskip}}
|
| 4290 |
|
|
%
|
| 4291 |
|
|
\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
|
| 4292 |
|
|
|
| 4293 |
|
|
\long\def\cartouche{%
|
| 4294 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4295 |
|
|
\lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
|
| 4296 |
|
|
\leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt %we want these *outside*.
|
| 4297 |
|
|
\cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
|
| 4298 |
|
|
\advance\cartinner by-\rskip
|
| 4299 |
|
|
\cartouter=\hsize
|
| 4300 |
|
|
\advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
|
| 4301 |
|
|
% side, and for 6pt waste from
|
| 4302 |
|
|
% each corner char, and rule thickness
|
| 4303 |
|
|
\normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
|
| 4304 |
|
|
% Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
|
| 4305 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\comment
|
| 4306 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
| 4307 |
|
|
\baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
|
| 4308 |
|
|
\carttop
|
| 4309 |
|
|
\hbox\bgroup
|
| 4310 |
|
|
\hskip\lskip
|
| 4311 |
|
|
\vrule\kern3pt
|
| 4312 |
|
|
\vbox\bgroup
|
| 4313 |
|
|
\hsize=\cartinner
|
| 4314 |
|
|
\kern3pt
|
| 4315 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4316 |
|
|
\baselineskip=\normbskip
|
| 4317 |
|
|
\lineskip=\normlskip
|
| 4318 |
|
|
\parskip=\normpskip
|
| 4319 |
|
|
\vskip -\parskip
|
| 4320 |
|
|
\def\Ecartouche{%
|
| 4321 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4322 |
|
|
\kern3pt
|
| 4323 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 4324 |
|
|
\kern3pt\vrule
|
| 4325 |
|
|
\hskip\rskip
|
| 4326 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 4327 |
|
|
\cartbot
|
| 4328 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 4329 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4330 |
|
|
}}
|
| 4331 |
|
|
|
| 4332 |
|
|
|
| 4333 |
|
|
% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
|
| 4334 |
|
|
% inside a group.
|
| 4335 |
|
|
\def\nonfillstart{%
|
| 4336 |
|
|
\aboveenvbreak
|
| 4337 |
|
|
\inENV % This group ends at the end of the body
|
| 4338 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
|
| 4339 |
|
|
\sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
|
| 4340 |
|
|
\singlespace
|
| 4341 |
|
|
\let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
|
| 4342 |
|
|
\obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
|
| 4343 |
|
|
\parskip = 0pt
|
| 4344 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt
|
| 4345 |
|
|
\emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
|
| 4346 |
|
|
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing
|
| 4347 |
|
|
% at next level down.
|
| 4348 |
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
| 4349 |
|
|
\advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| 4350 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
|
| 4351 |
|
|
\let\exdent=\nofillexdent
|
| 4352 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing=\relax
|
| 4353 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4354 |
|
|
}
|
| 4355 |
|
|
|
| 4356 |
|
|
% Define the \E... control sequence only if we are inside the particular
|
| 4357 |
|
|
% environment, so the error checking in \end will work.
|
| 4358 |
|
|
%
|
| 4359 |
|
|
% To end an @example-like environment, we first end the paragraph (via
|
| 4360 |
|
|
% \afterenvbreak's vertical glue), and then the group. That way we keep
|
| 4361 |
|
|
% the zero \parskip that the environments set -- \parskip glue will be
|
| 4362 |
|
|
% inserted at the beginning of the next paragraph in the document, after
|
| 4363 |
|
|
% the environment.
|
| 4364 |
|
|
%
|
| 4365 |
|
|
\def\nonfillfinish{\afterenvbreak\endgroup}
|
| 4366 |
|
|
|
| 4367 |
|
|
% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font.
|
| 4368 |
|
|
\def\lisp{\begingroup
|
| 4369 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 4370 |
|
|
\let\Elisp = \nonfillfinish
|
| 4371 |
|
|
\tt
|
| 4372 |
|
|
\let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
|
| 4373 |
|
|
\gobble % eat return
|
| 4374 |
|
|
}
|
| 4375 |
|
|
|
| 4376 |
|
|
% @example: Same as @lisp.
|
| 4377 |
|
|
\def\example{\begingroup \def\Eexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
| 4378 |
|
|
|
| 4379 |
|
|
% @small... is usually equivalent to the non-small (@smallbook
|
| 4380 |
|
|
% redefines). We must call \example (or whatever) last in the
|
| 4381 |
|
|
% definition, since it reads the return following the @example (or
|
| 4382 |
|
|
% whatever) command.
|
| 4383 |
|
|
%
|
| 4384 |
|
|
% This actually allows (for example) @end display inside an
|
| 4385 |
|
|
% @smalldisplay. Too bad, but makeinfo will catch the error anyway.
|
| 4386 |
|
|
%
|
| 4387 |
|
|
\def\smalldisplay{\begingroup\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\display}
|
| 4388 |
|
|
\def\smallexample{\begingroup\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
| 4389 |
|
|
\def\smallformat{\begingroup\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
|
| 4390 |
|
|
\def\smalllisp{\begingroup\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\lisp}
|
| 4391 |
|
|
|
| 4392 |
|
|
% Real @smallexample and @smalllisp (when @smallbook): use smaller fonts.
|
| 4393 |
|
|
% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
|
| 4394 |
|
|
\def\smalllispx{\begingroup
|
| 4395 |
|
|
\def\Esmalllisp{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
| 4396 |
|
|
\def\Esmallexample{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
| 4397 |
|
|
\smallexamplefonts
|
| 4398 |
|
|
\lisp
|
| 4399 |
|
|
}
|
| 4400 |
|
|
|
| 4401 |
|
|
% @display: same as @lisp except keep current font.
|
| 4402 |
|
|
%
|
| 4403 |
|
|
\def\display{\begingroup
|
| 4404 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 4405 |
|
|
\let\Edisplay = \nonfillfinish
|
| 4406 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 4407 |
|
|
}
|
| 4408 |
|
|
%
|
| 4409 |
|
|
% @smalldisplay (when @smallbook): @display plus smaller fonts.
|
| 4410 |
|
|
%
|
| 4411 |
|
|
\def\smalldisplayx{\begingroup
|
| 4412 |
|
|
\def\Esmalldisplay{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
| 4413 |
|
|
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
| 4414 |
|
|
\display
|
| 4415 |
|
|
}
|
| 4416 |
|
|
|
| 4417 |
|
|
% @format: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
|
| 4418 |
|
|
%
|
| 4419 |
|
|
\def\format{\begingroup
|
| 4420 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t
|
| 4421 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 4422 |
|
|
\let\Eformat = \nonfillfinish
|
| 4423 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 4424 |
|
|
}
|
| 4425 |
|
|
%
|
| 4426 |
|
|
% @smallformat (when @smallbook): @format plus smaller fonts.
|
| 4427 |
|
|
%
|
| 4428 |
|
|
\def\smallformatx{\begingroup
|
| 4429 |
|
|
\def\Esmallformat{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
| 4430 |
|
|
\smallexamplefonts \rm
|
| 4431 |
|
|
\format
|
| 4432 |
|
|
}
|
| 4433 |
|
|
|
| 4434 |
|
|
% @flushleft (same as @format).
|
| 4435 |
|
|
%
|
| 4436 |
|
|
\def\flushleft{\begingroup \def\Eflushleft{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}\format}
|
| 4437 |
|
|
|
| 4438 |
|
|
% @flushright.
|
| 4439 |
|
|
%
|
| 4440 |
|
|
\def\flushright{\begingroup
|
| 4441 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = t
|
| 4442 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 4443 |
|
|
\let\Eflushright = \nonfillfinish
|
| 4444 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
|
| 4445 |
|
|
\gobble
|
| 4446 |
|
|
}
|
| 4447 |
|
|
|
| 4448 |
|
|
|
| 4449 |
|
|
% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
|
| 4450 |
|
|
% and narrows the margins.
|
| 4451 |
|
|
%
|
| 4452 |
|
|
\def\quotation{%
|
| 4453 |
|
|
\begingroup\inENV %This group ends at the end of the @quotation body
|
| 4454 |
|
|
{\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
|
| 4455 |
|
|
\singlespace
|
| 4456 |
|
|
\parindent=0pt
|
| 4457 |
|
|
% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
|
| 4458 |
|
|
% doing normal filling. So to avoid extra space below the environment...
|
| 4459 |
|
|
\def\Equotation{\parskip = 0pt \nonfillfinish}%
|
| 4460 |
|
|
%
|
| 4461 |
|
|
% @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
|
| 4462 |
|
|
\ifx\nonarrowing\relax
|
| 4463 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| 4464 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
|
| 4465 |
|
|
\exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
|
| 4466 |
|
|
\let\nonarrowing = \relax
|
| 4467 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 4468 |
|
|
}
|
| 4469 |
|
|
|
| 4470 |
|
|
|
| 4471 |
|
|
% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
|
| 4472 |
|
|
% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
|
| 4473 |
|
|
% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
|
| 4474 |
|
|
% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke@gnu.org
|
| 4475 |
|
|
%
|
| 4476 |
|
|
% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
|
| 4477 |
|
|
%
|
| 4478 |
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 344; only we need to do '@' too
|
| 4479 |
|
|
\def\dospecials{%
|
| 4480 |
|
|
\do\ \do\\\do\@\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
|
| 4481 |
|
|
\do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~}
|
| 4482 |
|
|
%
|
| 4483 |
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 380
|
| 4484 |
|
|
\def\uncatcodespecials{%
|
| 4485 |
|
|
\def\do##1{\catcode`##1=12}\dospecials}
|
| 4486 |
|
|
%
|
| 4487 |
|
|
% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
|
| 4488 |
|
|
% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
|
| 4489 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4490 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
|
| 4491 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4492 |
|
|
%
|
| 4493 |
|
|
% Setup for the @verb command.
|
| 4494 |
|
|
%
|
| 4495 |
|
|
% Eight spaces for a tab
|
| 4496 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4497 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| 4498 |
|
|
\gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
|
| 4499 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4500 |
|
|
%
|
| 4501 |
|
|
\def\setupverb{%
|
| 4502 |
|
|
\tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
| 4503 |
|
|
\def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
|
| 4504 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
| 4505 |
|
|
\tabeightspaces
|
| 4506 |
|
|
% Respect line breaks,
|
| 4507 |
|
|
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
| 4508 |
|
|
% make each space count
|
| 4509 |
|
|
% must do in this order:
|
| 4510 |
|
|
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
| 4511 |
|
|
}
|
| 4512 |
|
|
|
| 4513 |
|
|
% Setup for the @verbatim environment
|
| 4514 |
|
|
%
|
| 4515 |
|
|
% Real tab expansion
|
| 4516 |
|
|
\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
|
| 4517 |
|
|
%
|
| 4518 |
|
|
\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
|
| 4519 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4520 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| 4521 |
|
|
\gdef\tabexpand{%
|
| 4522 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^I=\active
|
| 4523 |
|
|
\def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
|
| 4524 |
|
|
\dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
|
| 4525 |
|
|
\divide\dimen0 by\tabw
|
| 4526 |
|
|
\multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
|
| 4527 |
|
|
\advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
|
| 4528 |
|
|
\wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
|
| 4529 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4530 |
|
|
}
|
| 4531 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4532 |
|
|
\def\setupverbatim{%
|
| 4533 |
|
|
% Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
|
| 4534 |
|
|
\tt
|
| 4535 |
|
|
\def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
|
| 4536 |
|
|
\catcode`\`=\active
|
| 4537 |
|
|
\tabexpand
|
| 4538 |
|
|
% Respect line breaks,
|
| 4539 |
|
|
% print special symbols as themselves, and
|
| 4540 |
|
|
% make each space count
|
| 4541 |
|
|
% must do in this order:
|
| 4542 |
|
|
\obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
|
| 4543 |
|
|
\everypar{\starttabbox}%
|
| 4544 |
|
|
}
|
| 4545 |
|
|
|
| 4546 |
|
|
% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
|
| 4547 |
|
|
% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
|
| 4548 |
|
|
% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
|
| 4549 |
|
|
%
|
| 4550 |
|
|
% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
|
| 4551 |
|
|
%
|
| 4552 |
|
|
% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
|
| 4553 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4554 |
|
|
\catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12
|
| 4555 |
|
|
\gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
|
| 4556 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4557 |
|
|
%
|
| 4558 |
|
|
\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
|
| 4559 |
|
|
%
|
| 4560 |
|
|
%
|
| 4561 |
|
|
% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
|
| 4562 |
|
|
% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
|
| 4563 |
|
|
%
|
| 4564 |
|
|
% \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
|
| 4565 |
|
|
%
|
| 4566 |
|
|
% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
|
| 4567 |
|
|
% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
|
| 4568 |
|
|
% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'
|
| 4569 |
|
|
%
|
| 4570 |
|
|
% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
|
| 4571 |
|
|
%% Include LaTeX hack for completeness -- never know
|
| 4572 |
|
|
%% \begingroup
|
| 4573 |
|
|
%% \catcode`|=0 \catcode`[=1
|
| 4574 |
|
|
%% \catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=12\catcode`\}=12\catcode`\ =\active
|
| 4575 |
|
|
%% \catcode`\\=12|gdef|doverbatim#1@end verbatim[
|
| 4576 |
|
|
%% #1|endgroup|def|Everbatim[]|end[verbatim]]
|
| 4577 |
|
|
%% |endgroup
|
| 4578 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4579 |
|
|
\catcode`\ =\active
|
| 4580 |
|
|
\gdef\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1\end{verbatim}}
|
| 4581 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4582 |
|
|
%
|
| 4583 |
|
|
\def\verbatim{%
|
| 4584 |
|
|
\def\Everbatim{\nonfillfinish\endgroup}%
|
| 4585 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4586 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 4587 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
| 4588 |
|
|
\begingroup\setupverbatim\doverbatim
|
| 4589 |
|
|
}
|
| 4590 |
|
|
|
| 4591 |
|
|
% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
|
| 4592 |
|
|
%
|
| 4593 |
|
|
% Allow normal characters that we make active in the argument (a file name).
|
| 4594 |
|
|
\def\verbatiminclude{%
|
| 4595 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4596 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=12
|
| 4597 |
|
|
\catcode`~=12
|
| 4598 |
|
|
\catcode`^=12
|
| 4599 |
|
|
\catcode`_=12
|
| 4600 |
|
|
\catcode`|=12
|
| 4601 |
|
|
\catcode`<=12
|
| 4602 |
|
|
\catcode`>=12
|
| 4603 |
|
|
\catcode`+=12
|
| 4604 |
|
|
\parsearg\doverbatiminclude
|
| 4605 |
|
|
}
|
| 4606 |
|
|
\def\setupverbatiminclude{%
|
| 4607 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4608 |
|
|
\nonfillstart
|
| 4609 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
| 4610 |
|
|
\begingroup\setupverbatim
|
| 4611 |
|
|
}
|
| 4612 |
|
|
%
|
| 4613 |
|
|
\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
|
| 4614 |
|
|
% Restore active chars for included file.
|
| 4615 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 4616 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4617 |
|
|
\def\thisfile{#1}%
|
| 4618 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\setupverbatiminclude\input\thisfile
|
| 4619 |
|
|
\endgroup\nonfillfinish\endgroup
|
| 4620 |
|
|
}
|
| 4621 |
|
|
|
| 4622 |
|
|
% @copying ... @end copying.
|
| 4623 |
|
|
% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
|
| 4624 |
|
|
%
|
| 4625 |
|
|
\newbox\copyingbox
|
| 4626 |
|
|
%
|
| 4627 |
|
|
\def\copying{\begingroup
|
| 4628 |
|
|
\parindent = 0pt % looks wrong on title page
|
| 4629 |
|
|
\def\Ecopying{\egroup\endgroup}%
|
| 4630 |
|
|
\global\setbox\copyingbox = \vbox\bgroup
|
| 4631 |
|
|
}
|
| 4632 |
|
|
|
| 4633 |
|
|
% @insertcopying.
|
| 4634 |
|
|
%
|
| 4635 |
|
|
\def\insertcopying{\unvcopy\copyingbox}
|
| 4636 |
|
|
|
| 4637 |
|
|
|
| 4638 |
|
|
\message{defuns,}
|
| 4639 |
|
|
% @defun etc.
|
| 4640 |
|
|
|
| 4641 |
|
|
% Allow user to change definition object font (\df) internally
|
| 4642 |
|
|
\def\setdeffont #1 {\csname DEF#1\endcsname}
|
| 4643 |
|
|
|
| 4644 |
|
|
\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
|
| 4645 |
|
|
\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
|
| 4646 |
|
|
\newskip\deftypemargin \deftypemargin=12pt
|
| 4647 |
|
|
\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
|
| 4648 |
|
|
|
| 4649 |
|
|
\newcount\parencount
|
| 4650 |
|
|
% define \functionparens, which makes ( and ) and & do special things.
|
| 4651 |
|
|
% \functionparens affects the group it is contained in.
|
| 4652 |
|
|
\def\activeparens{%
|
| 4653 |
|
|
\catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active \catcode`\&=\active
|
| 4654 |
|
|
\catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active}
|
| 4655 |
|
|
|
| 4656 |
|
|
% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
|
| 4657 |
|
|
\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
|
| 4658 |
|
|
|
| 4659 |
|
|
{\activeparens % Now, smart parens don't turn on until &foo (see \amprm)
|
| 4660 |
|
|
|
| 4661 |
|
|
% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
|
| 4662 |
|
|
% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
|
| 4663 |
|
|
% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
|
| 4664 |
|
|
\global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
|
| 4665 |
|
|
\global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
|
| 4666 |
|
|
|
| 4667 |
|
|
\gdef\functionparens{\boldbrax\let&=\amprm\parencount=0 }
|
| 4668 |
|
|
\gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
|
| 4669 |
|
|
% This is used to turn on special parens
|
| 4670 |
|
|
% but make & act ordinary (given that it's active).
|
| 4671 |
|
|
\gdef\boldbraxnoamp{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb\let&=\ampnr}
|
| 4672 |
|
|
|
| 4673 |
|
|
% Definitions of (, ) and & used in args for functions.
|
| 4674 |
|
|
% This is the definition of ( outside of all parentheses.
|
| 4675 |
|
|
\gdef\oprm#1 {{\rm\char`\(}#1 \bf \let(=\opnested
|
| 4676 |
|
|
\global\advance\parencount by 1
|
| 4677 |
|
|
}
|
| 4678 |
|
|
%
|
| 4679 |
|
|
% This is the definition of ( when already inside a level of parens.
|
| 4680 |
|
|
\gdef\opnested{\char`\(\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
| 4681 |
|
|
%
|
| 4682 |
|
|
\gdef\clrm{% Print a paren in roman if it is taking us back to depth of 0.
|
| 4683 |
|
|
% also in that case restore the outer-level definition of (.
|
| 4684 |
|
|
\ifnum \parencount=1 {\rm \char `\)}\sl \let(=\oprm \else \char `\) \fi
|
| 4685 |
|
|
\global\advance \parencount by -1 }
|
| 4686 |
|
|
% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
|
| 4687 |
|
|
\gdef\amprm#1 {{\rm\}\let(=\oprm \let)=\clrm\ }
|
| 4688 |
|
|
%
|
| 4689 |
|
|
\gdef\normalparens{\boldbrax\let&=\ampnr}
|
| 4690 |
|
|
} % End of definition inside \activeparens
|
| 4691 |
|
|
%% These parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than the
|
| 4692 |
|
|
%% contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ]
|
| 4693 |
|
|
\def\opnr{{\sf\char`\(}\global\advance\parencount by 1 }
|
| 4694 |
|
|
\def\clnr{{\sf\char`\)}\global\advance\parencount by -1 }
|
| 4695 |
|
|
\let\ampnr = \&
|
| 4696 |
|
|
\def\lbrb{{\bf\char`\[}}
|
| 4697 |
|
|
\def\rbrb{{\bf\char`\]}}
|
| 4698 |
|
|
|
| 4699 |
|
|
% Active &'s sneak into the index arguments, so make sure it's defined.
|
| 4700 |
|
|
{
|
| 4701 |
|
|
\catcode`& = 13
|
| 4702 |
|
|
\global\let& = \ampnr
|
| 4703 |
|
|
}
|
| 4704 |
|
|
|
| 4705 |
|
|
% First, defname, which formats the header line itself.
|
| 4706 |
|
|
% #1 should be the function name.
|
| 4707 |
|
|
% #2 should be the type of definition, such as "Function".
|
| 4708 |
|
|
|
| 4709 |
|
|
\def\defname #1#2{%
|
| 4710 |
|
|
% Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were
|
| 4711 |
|
|
% outside the @def...
|
| 4712 |
|
|
\dimen2=\leftskip
|
| 4713 |
|
|
\advance\dimen2 by -\defbodyindent
|
| 4714 |
|
|
\noindent
|
| 4715 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\hskip \deflastargmargin{\rm #2}\hskip \deftypemargin}%
|
| 4716 |
|
|
\dimen0=\hsize \advance \dimen0 by -\wd0 % compute size for first line
|
| 4717 |
|
|
\dimen1=\hsize \advance \dimen1 by -\defargsindent %size for continuations
|
| 4718 |
|
|
\parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen1
|
| 4719 |
|
|
% Now output arg 2 ("Function" or some such)
|
| 4720 |
|
|
% ending at \deftypemargin from the right margin,
|
| 4721 |
|
|
% but stuck inside a box of width 0 so it does not interfere with linebreaking
|
| 4722 |
|
|
{% Adjust \hsize to exclude the ambient margins,
|
| 4723 |
|
|
% so that \rightline will obey them.
|
| 4724 |
|
|
\advance \hsize by -\dimen2
|
| 4725 |
|
|
\rlap{\rightline{{\rm #2}\hskip -1.25pc }}}%
|
| 4726 |
|
|
% Make all lines underfull and no complaints:
|
| 4727 |
|
|
\tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
|
| 4728 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
|
| 4729 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
| 4730 |
|
|
{\df #1}\enskip % Generate function name
|
| 4731 |
|
|
}
|
| 4732 |
|
|
|
| 4733 |
|
|
% Common pieces to start any @def...
|
| 4734 |
|
|
% #1 is the \E... control sequence to end the definition (which we define).
|
| 4735 |
|
|
% #2 is the \...x control sequence (which our caller defines).
|
| 4736 |
|
|
% #3 is the control sequence to process the header, such as \defunheader.
|
| 4737 |
|
|
%
|
| 4738 |
|
|
\def\parsebodycommon#1#2#3{%
|
| 4739 |
|
|
\begingroup\inENV
|
| 4740 |
|
|
% If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
|
| 4741 |
|
|
% which is there to keep the function description together with its
|
| 4742 |
|
|
% header. But if there's nothing but headers, we want to allow a
|
| 4743 |
|
|
% break after all.
|
| 4744 |
|
|
\ifnum\lastpenalty = 10000 \penalty0 \fi
|
| 4745 |
|
|
\medbreak
|
| 4746 |
|
|
%
|
| 4747 |
|
|
% Define the \E... end token that this defining construct specifies
|
| 4748 |
|
|
% so that it will exit this group.
|
| 4749 |
|
|
\def#1{\endgraf\endgroup\medbreak}%
|
| 4750 |
|
|
%
|
| 4751 |
|
|
\parindent=0in
|
| 4752 |
|
|
\advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
|
| 4753 |
|
|
\exdentamount=\defbodyindent
|
| 4754 |
|
|
}
|
| 4755 |
|
|
|
| 4756 |
|
|
% Process body of @defun, @deffn, @defmac, etc.
|
| 4757 |
|
|
%
|
| 4758 |
|
|
\def\defparsebody#1#2#3{%
|
| 4759 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4760 |
|
|
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit#3}%
|
| 4761 |
|
|
\catcode61=\active % 61 is `='
|
| 4762 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
|
| 4763 |
|
|
\spacesplit#3%
|
| 4764 |
|
|
}
|
| 4765 |
|
|
|
| 4766 |
|
|
% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
|
| 4767 |
|
|
% #4, delimited by the space, is the class name.
|
| 4768 |
|
|
%
|
| 4769 |
|
|
\def\defmethparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
|
| 4770 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4771 |
|
|
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
| 4772 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
|
| 4773 |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
|
| 4774 |
|
|
}
|
| 4775 |
|
|
|
| 4776 |
|
|
% Used for @deftypemethod and @deftypeivar.
|
| 4777 |
|
|
% #1, #2, #3 are the common arguments (see \defparsebody).
|
| 4778 |
|
|
% #4, delimited by a space, is the class name.
|
| 4779 |
|
|
% #5 is the method's return type.
|
| 4780 |
|
|
%
|
| 4781 |
|
|
\def\deftypemethparsebody#1#2#3#4 #5 {%
|
| 4782 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4783 |
|
|
\def#2##1 ##2 {\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##1}{##2}}}%
|
| 4784 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
|
| 4785 |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#4}{#5}}%
|
| 4786 |
|
|
}
|
| 4787 |
|
|
|
| 4788 |
|
|
% Used for @deftypeop. The change from \deftypemethparsebody is an
|
| 4789 |
|
|
% extra argument at the beginning which is the `category', instead of it
|
| 4790 |
|
|
% being the hardwired string `Method' or `Instance Variable'. We have
|
| 4791 |
|
|
% to account for this both in the \...x definition and in parsing the
|
| 4792 |
|
|
% input at hand. Thus also need a control sequence (passed as #5) for
|
| 4793 |
|
|
% the \E... definition to assign the category name to.
|
| 4794 |
|
|
%
|
| 4795 |
|
|
\def\deftypeopparsebody#1#2#3#4#5 #6 {%
|
| 4796 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4797 |
|
|
\def#2##1 ##2 ##3 {%
|
| 4798 |
|
|
\def#4{##1}%
|
| 4799 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}{##3}}}%
|
| 4800 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
|
| 4801 |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#5}{#6}}%
|
| 4802 |
|
|
}
|
| 4803 |
|
|
|
| 4804 |
|
|
% For @defop.
|
| 4805 |
|
|
\def\defopparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
|
| 4806 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4807 |
|
|
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
| 4808 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
| 4809 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\activeparens
|
| 4810 |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
|
| 4811 |
|
|
}
|
| 4812 |
|
|
|
| 4813 |
|
|
% These parsing functions are similar to the preceding ones
|
| 4814 |
|
|
% except that they do not make parens into active characters.
|
| 4815 |
|
|
% These are used for "variables" since they have no arguments.
|
| 4816 |
|
|
%
|
| 4817 |
|
|
\def\defvarparsebody #1#2#3{%
|
| 4818 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4819 |
|
|
\def#2{\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit#3}%
|
| 4820 |
|
|
\catcode61=\active %
|
| 4821 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines
|
| 4822 |
|
|
\spacesplit#3%
|
| 4823 |
|
|
}
|
| 4824 |
|
|
|
| 4825 |
|
|
% @defopvar.
|
| 4826 |
|
|
\def\defopvarparsebody #1#2#3#4#5 {%
|
| 4827 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4828 |
|
|
\def#2##1 ##2 {\def#4{##1}%
|
| 4829 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##2}}}%
|
| 4830 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines
|
| 4831 |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#5}}%
|
| 4832 |
|
|
}
|
| 4833 |
|
|
|
| 4834 |
|
|
\def\defvrparsebody#1#2#3#4 {%
|
| 4835 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4836 |
|
|
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
| 4837 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines
|
| 4838 |
|
|
\spacesplit{#3{#4}}%
|
| 4839 |
|
|
}
|
| 4840 |
|
|
|
| 4841 |
|
|
% This loses on `@deftp {Data Type} {struct termios}' -- it thinks the
|
| 4842 |
|
|
% type is just `struct', because we lose the braces in `{struct
|
| 4843 |
|
|
% termios}' when \spacesplit reads its undelimited argument. Sigh.
|
| 4844 |
|
|
% \let\deftpparsebody=\defvrparsebody
|
| 4845 |
|
|
%
|
| 4846 |
|
|
% So, to get around this, we put \empty in with the type name. That
|
| 4847 |
|
|
% way, TeX won't find exactly `{...}' as an undelimited argument, and
|
| 4848 |
|
|
% won't strip off the braces.
|
| 4849 |
|
|
%
|
| 4850 |
|
|
\def\deftpparsebody #1#2#3#4 {%
|
| 4851 |
|
|
\parsebodycommon{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 4852 |
|
|
\def#2##1 {\begingroup\obeylines\spacesplit{#3{##1}}}%
|
| 4853 |
|
|
\begingroup\obeylines
|
| 4854 |
|
|
\spacesplit{\parsetpheaderline{#3{#4}}}\empty
|
| 4855 |
|
|
}
|
| 4856 |
|
|
|
| 4857 |
|
|
% Fine, but then we have to eventually remove the \empty *and* the
|
| 4858 |
|
|
% braces (if any). That's what this does.
|
| 4859 |
|
|
%
|
| 4860 |
|
|
\def\removeemptybraces\empty#1\relax{#1}
|
| 4861 |
|
|
|
| 4862 |
|
|
% After \spacesplit has done its work, this is called -- #1 is the final
|
| 4863 |
|
|
% thing to call, #2 the type name (which starts with \empty), and #3
|
| 4864 |
|
|
% (which might be empty) the arguments.
|
| 4865 |
|
|
%
|
| 4866 |
|
|
\def\parsetpheaderline#1#2#3{%
|
| 4867 |
|
|
#1{\removeemptybraces#2\relax}{#3}%
|
| 4868 |
|
|
}%
|
| 4869 |
|
|
|
| 4870 |
|
|
% Split up #2 at the first space token.
|
| 4871 |
|
|
% call #1 with two arguments:
|
| 4872 |
|
|
% the first is all of #2 before the space token,
|
| 4873 |
|
|
% the second is all of #2 after that space token.
|
| 4874 |
|
|
% If #2 contains no space token, all of it is passed as the first arg
|
| 4875 |
|
|
% and the second is passed as empty.
|
| 4876 |
|
|
%
|
| 4877 |
|
|
{\obeylines
|
| 4878 |
|
|
\gdef\spacesplit#1#2^^M{\endgroup\spacesplitfoo{#1}#2 \relax\spacesplitfoo}%
|
| 4879 |
|
|
\long\gdef\spacesplitfoo#1#2 #3#4\spacesplitfoo{%
|
| 4880 |
|
|
\ifx\relax #3%
|
| 4881 |
|
|
#1{#2}{}\else #1{#2}{#3#4}\fi}}
|
| 4882 |
|
|
|
| 4883 |
|
|
% Define @defun.
|
| 4884 |
|
|
|
| 4885 |
|
|
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of \defun
|
| 4886 |
|
|
% Use this to expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
| 4887 |
|
|
|
| 4888 |
|
|
\def\defunargs#1{\functionparens \sl
|
| 4889 |
|
|
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
| 4890 |
|
|
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
| 4891 |
|
|
% Set the font temporarily and use \font in case \setfont made \tensl a macro.
|
| 4892 |
|
|
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=0}%
|
| 4893 |
|
|
#1%
|
| 4894 |
|
|
{\tensl\hyphenchar\font=45}%
|
| 4895 |
|
|
\ifnum\parencount=0 \else \errmessage{Unbalanced parentheses in @def}\fi%
|
| 4896 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000
|
| 4897 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
| 4898 |
|
|
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
| 4899 |
|
|
}
|
| 4900 |
|
|
|
| 4901 |
|
|
\def\deftypefunargs #1{%
|
| 4902 |
|
|
% Expand, preventing hyphenation at `-' chars.
|
| 4903 |
|
|
% Note that groups don't affect changes in \hyphenchar.
|
| 4904 |
|
|
% Use \boldbraxnoamp, not \functionparens, so that & is not special.
|
| 4905 |
|
|
\boldbraxnoamp
|
| 4906 |
|
|
\tclose{#1}% avoid \code because of side effects on active chars
|
| 4907 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000
|
| 4908 |
|
|
\advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
|
| 4909 |
|
|
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
| 4910 |
|
|
}
|
| 4911 |
|
|
|
| 4912 |
|
|
% Do complete processing of one @defun or @defunx line already parsed.
|
| 4913 |
|
|
|
| 4914 |
|
|
% @deffn Command forward-char nchars
|
| 4915 |
|
|
|
| 4916 |
|
|
\def\deffn{\defmethparsebody\Edeffn\deffnx\deffnheader}
|
| 4917 |
|
|
|
| 4918 |
|
|
\def\deffnheader #1#2#3{\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}%
|
| 4919 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defunargs{#3}\endgroup %
|
| 4920 |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
| 4921 |
|
|
}
|
| 4922 |
|
|
|
| 4923 |
|
|
% @defun == @deffn Function
|
| 4924 |
|
|
|
| 4925 |
|
|
\def\defun{\defparsebody\Edefun\defunx\defunheader}
|
| 4926 |
|
|
|
| 4927 |
|
|
\def\defunheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
| 4928 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDeffunc}%
|
| 4929 |
|
|
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
| 4930 |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
| 4931 |
|
|
}
|
| 4932 |
|
|
|
| 4933 |
|
|
% @deftypefun int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
| 4934 |
|
|
|
| 4935 |
|
|
\def\deftypefun{\defparsebody\Edeftypefun\deftypefunx\deftypefunheader}
|
| 4936 |
|
|
|
| 4937 |
|
|
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name and args.
|
| 4938 |
|
|
\def\deftypefunheader #1#2{\deftypefunheaderx{#1}#2 \relax}
|
| 4939 |
|
|
% #1 is the data type, #2 the name, #3 the args.
|
| 4940 |
|
|
\def\deftypefunheaderx #1#2 #3\relax{%
|
| 4941 |
|
|
\doind {fn}{\code{#2}}% Make entry in function index
|
| 4942 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypefun}%
|
| 4943 |
|
|
\deftypefunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
| 4944 |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
| 4945 |
|
|
}
|
| 4946 |
|
|
|
| 4947 |
|
|
% @deftypefn {Library Function} int foobar (int @var{foo}, float @var{bar})
|
| 4948 |
|
|
|
| 4949 |
|
|
\def\deftypefn{\defmethparsebody\Edeftypefn\deftypefnx\deftypefnheader}
|
| 4950 |
|
|
|
| 4951 |
|
|
% \defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$
|
| 4952 |
|
|
% puts #1 in @code, followed by a space, but does nothing if #1 is null.
|
| 4953 |
|
|
\def\defheaderxcond#1#2$.${\ifx#1\relax\else\code{#1#2} \fi}
|
| 4954 |
|
|
|
| 4955 |
|
|
% #1 is the classification. #2 is the data type. #3 is the name and args.
|
| 4956 |
|
|
\def\deftypefnheader #1#2#3{\deftypefnheaderx{#1}{#2}#3 \relax}
|
| 4957 |
|
|
% #1 is the classification, #2 the data type, #3 the name, #4 the args.
|
| 4958 |
|
|
\def\deftypefnheaderx #1#2#3 #4\relax{%
|
| 4959 |
|
|
\doind {fn}{\code{#3}}% Make entry in function index
|
| 4960 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 4961 |
|
|
\normalparens % notably, turn off `&' magic, which prevents
|
| 4962 |
|
|
% at least some C++ text from working
|
| 4963 |
|
|
\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}%
|
| 4964 |
|
|
\deftypefunargs {#4}\endgroup %
|
| 4965 |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
| 4966 |
|
|
}
|
| 4967 |
|
|
|
| 4968 |
|
|
% @defmac == @deffn Macro
|
| 4969 |
|
|
|
| 4970 |
|
|
\def\defmac{\defparsebody\Edefmac\defmacx\defmacheader}
|
| 4971 |
|
|
|
| 4972 |
|
|
\def\defmacheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
| 4973 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefmac}%
|
| 4974 |
|
|
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
| 4975 |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
| 4976 |
|
|
}
|
| 4977 |
|
|
|
| 4978 |
|
|
% @defspec == @deffn Special Form
|
| 4979 |
|
|
|
| 4980 |
|
|
\def\defspec{\defparsebody\Edefspec\defspecx\defspecheader}
|
| 4981 |
|
|
|
| 4982 |
|
|
\def\defspecheader #1#2{\doind {fn}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in function index
|
| 4983 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefspec}%
|
| 4984 |
|
|
\defunargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
| 4985 |
|
|
\catcode 61=\other % Turn off change made in \defparsebody
|
| 4986 |
|
|
}
|
| 4987 |
|
|
|
| 4988 |
|
|
% @defop CATEGORY CLASS OPERATION ARG...
|
| 4989 |
|
|
%
|
| 4990 |
|
|
\def\defop #1 {\def\defoptype{#1}%
|
| 4991 |
|
|
\defopparsebody\Edefop\defopx\defopheader\defoptype}
|
| 4992 |
|
|
%
|
| 4993 |
|
|
\def\defopheader#1#2#3{%
|
| 4994 |
|
|
\dosubind {fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ #1}% Make entry in function index
|
| 4995 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defoptype\ \putwordon\ #1}%
|
| 4996 |
|
|
\defunargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
| 4997 |
|
|
}
|
| 4998 |
|
|
|
| 4999 |
|
|
% @deftypeop CATEGORY CLASS TYPE OPERATION ARG...
|
| 5000 |
|
|
%
|
| 5001 |
|
|
\def\deftypeop #1 {\def\deftypeopcategory{#1}%
|
| 5002 |
|
|
\deftypeopparsebody\Edeftypeop\deftypeopx\deftypeopheader
|
| 5003 |
|
|
\deftypeopcategory}
|
| 5004 |
|
|
%
|
| 5005 |
|
|
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the operation name, #4 the args.
|
| 5006 |
|
|
\def\deftypeopheader#1#2#3#4{%
|
| 5007 |
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
| 5008 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5009 |
|
|
\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
|
| 5010 |
|
|
{\deftypeopcategory\ \putwordon\ \code{#1}}%
|
| 5011 |
|
|
\deftypefunargs{#4}%
|
| 5012 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5013 |
|
|
}
|
| 5014 |
|
|
|
| 5015 |
|
|
% @deftypemethod CLASS TYPE METHOD ARG...
|
| 5016 |
|
|
%
|
| 5017 |
|
|
\def\deftypemethod{%
|
| 5018 |
|
|
\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypemethod\deftypemethodx\deftypemethodheader}
|
| 5019 |
|
|
%
|
| 5020 |
|
|
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the method name, #4 the args.
|
| 5021 |
|
|
\def\deftypemethodheader#1#2#3#4{%
|
| 5022 |
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
| 5023 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5024 |
|
|
\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
|
| 5025 |
|
|
\deftypefunargs{#4}%
|
| 5026 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5027 |
|
|
}
|
| 5028 |
|
|
|
| 5029 |
|
|
% @deftypeivar CLASS TYPE VARNAME
|
| 5030 |
|
|
%
|
| 5031 |
|
|
\def\deftypeivar{%
|
| 5032 |
|
|
\deftypemethparsebody\Edeftypeivar\deftypeivarx\deftypeivarheader}
|
| 5033 |
|
|
%
|
| 5034 |
|
|
% #1 is the class name, #2 the data type, #3 the variable name.
|
| 5035 |
|
|
\def\deftypeivarheader#1#2#3{%
|
| 5036 |
|
|
\dosubind{vr}{\code{#3}}{\putwordof\ \code{#1}}% entry in variable index
|
| 5037 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5038 |
|
|
\defname{\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}
|
| 5039 |
|
|
{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ \code{#1}}%
|
| 5040 |
|
|
\defvarargs{#3}%
|
| 5041 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5042 |
|
|
}
|
| 5043 |
|
|
|
| 5044 |
|
|
% @defmethod == @defop Method
|
| 5045 |
|
|
%
|
| 5046 |
|
|
\def\defmethod{\defmethparsebody\Edefmethod\defmethodx\defmethodheader}
|
| 5047 |
|
|
%
|
| 5048 |
|
|
% #1 is the class name, #2 the method name, #3 the args.
|
| 5049 |
|
|
\def\defmethodheader#1#2#3{%
|
| 5050 |
|
|
\dosubind{fn}{\code{#2}}{\putwordon\ \code{#1}}% entry in function index
|
| 5051 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5052 |
|
|
\defname{#2}{\putwordMethodon\ \code{#1}}%
|
| 5053 |
|
|
\defunargs{#3}%
|
| 5054 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5055 |
|
|
}
|
| 5056 |
|
|
|
| 5057 |
|
|
% @defcv {Class Option} foo-class foo-flag
|
| 5058 |
|
|
|
| 5059 |
|
|
\def\defcv #1 {\def\defcvtype{#1}%
|
| 5060 |
|
|
\defopvarparsebody\Edefcv\defcvx\defcvarheader\defcvtype}
|
| 5061 |
|
|
|
| 5062 |
|
|
\def\defcvarheader #1#2#3{%
|
| 5063 |
|
|
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% Make entry in var index
|
| 5064 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{\defcvtype\ \putwordof\ #1}%
|
| 5065 |
|
|
\defvarargs {#3}\endgroup %
|
| 5066 |
|
|
}
|
| 5067 |
|
|
|
| 5068 |
|
|
% @defivar CLASS VARNAME == @defcv {Instance Variable} CLASS VARNAME
|
| 5069 |
|
|
%
|
| 5070 |
|
|
\def\defivar{\defvrparsebody\Edefivar\defivarx\defivarheader}
|
| 5071 |
|
|
%
|
| 5072 |
|
|
\def\defivarheader#1#2#3{%
|
| 5073 |
|
|
\dosubind {vr}{\code{#2}}{\putwordof\ #1}% entry in var index
|
| 5074 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5075 |
|
|
\defname{#2}{\putwordInstanceVariableof\ #1}%
|
| 5076 |
|
|
\defvarargs{#3}%
|
| 5077 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5078 |
|
|
}
|
| 5079 |
|
|
|
| 5080 |
|
|
% @defvar
|
| 5081 |
|
|
% First, define the processing that is wanted for arguments of @defvar.
|
| 5082 |
|
|
% This is actually simple: just print them in roman.
|
| 5083 |
|
|
% This must expand the args and terminate the paragraph they make up
|
| 5084 |
|
|
\def\defvarargs #1{\normalparens #1%
|
| 5085 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000
|
| 5086 |
|
|
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak}
|
| 5087 |
|
|
|
| 5088 |
|
|
% @defvr Counter foo-count
|
| 5089 |
|
|
|
| 5090 |
|
|
\def\defvr{\defvrparsebody\Edefvr\defvrx\defvrheader}
|
| 5091 |
|
|
|
| 5092 |
|
|
\def\defvrheader #1#2#3{\doind {vr}{\code{#2}}%
|
| 5093 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\defvarargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
| 5094 |
|
|
|
| 5095 |
|
|
% @defvar == @defvr Variable
|
| 5096 |
|
|
|
| 5097 |
|
|
\def\defvar{\defvarparsebody\Edefvar\defvarx\defvarheader}
|
| 5098 |
|
|
|
| 5099 |
|
|
\def\defvarheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
| 5100 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefvar}%
|
| 5101 |
|
|
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
| 5102 |
|
|
}
|
| 5103 |
|
|
|
| 5104 |
|
|
% @defopt == @defvr {User Option}
|
| 5105 |
|
|
|
| 5106 |
|
|
\def\defopt{\defvarparsebody\Edefopt\defoptx\defoptheader}
|
| 5107 |
|
|
|
| 5108 |
|
|
\def\defoptheader #1#2{\doind {vr}{\code{#1}}% Make entry in var index
|
| 5109 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#1}{\putwordDefopt}%
|
| 5110 |
|
|
\defvarargs {#2}\endgroup %
|
| 5111 |
|
|
}
|
| 5112 |
|
|
|
| 5113 |
|
|
% @deftypevar int foobar
|
| 5114 |
|
|
|
| 5115 |
|
|
\def\deftypevar{\defvarparsebody\Edeftypevar\deftypevarx\deftypevarheader}
|
| 5116 |
|
|
|
| 5117 |
|
|
% #1 is the data type. #2 is the name, perhaps followed by text that
|
| 5118 |
|
|
% is actually part of the data type, which should not be put into the index.
|
| 5119 |
|
|
\def\deftypevarheader #1#2{%
|
| 5120 |
|
|
\dovarind#2 \relax% Make entry in variables index
|
| 5121 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#1\relax$.$#2}{\putwordDeftypevar}%
|
| 5122 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000
|
| 5123 |
|
|
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
| 5124 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5125 |
|
|
\def\dovarind#1 #2\relax{\doind{vr}{\code{#1}}}
|
| 5126 |
|
|
|
| 5127 |
|
|
% @deftypevr {Global Flag} int enable
|
| 5128 |
|
|
|
| 5129 |
|
|
\def\deftypevr{\defvrparsebody\Edeftypevr\deftypevrx\deftypevrheader}
|
| 5130 |
|
|
|
| 5131 |
|
|
\def\deftypevrheader #1#2#3{\dovarind#3 \relax%
|
| 5132 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {\defheaderxcond#2\relax$.$#3}{#1}
|
| 5133 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty=10000
|
| 5134 |
|
|
\endgraf\nobreak\vskip -\parskip\nobreak
|
| 5135 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5136 |
|
|
|
| 5137 |
|
|
% Now define @deftp
|
| 5138 |
|
|
% Args are printed in bold, a slight difference from @defvar.
|
| 5139 |
|
|
|
| 5140 |
|
|
\def\deftpargs #1{\bf \defvarargs{#1}}
|
| 5141 |
|
|
|
| 5142 |
|
|
% @deftp Class window height width ...
|
| 5143 |
|
|
|
| 5144 |
|
|
\def\deftp{\deftpparsebody\Edeftp\deftpx\deftpheader}
|
| 5145 |
|
|
|
| 5146 |
|
|
\def\deftpheader #1#2#3{\doind {tp}{\code{#2}}%
|
| 5147 |
|
|
\begingroup\defname {#2}{#1}\deftpargs{#3}\endgroup}
|
| 5148 |
|
|
|
| 5149 |
|
|
% These definitions are used if you use @defunx (etc.)
|
| 5150 |
|
|
% anywhere other than immediately after a @defun or @defunx.
|
| 5151 |
|
|
%
|
| 5152 |
|
|
\def\defcvx#1 {\errmessage{@defcvx in invalid context}}
|
| 5153 |
|
|
\def\deffnx#1 {\errmessage{@deffnx in invalid context}}
|
| 5154 |
|
|
\def\defivarx#1 {\errmessage{@defivarx in invalid context}}
|
| 5155 |
|
|
\def\defmacx#1 {\errmessage{@defmacx in invalid context}}
|
| 5156 |
|
|
\def\defmethodx#1 {\errmessage{@defmethodx in invalid context}}
|
| 5157 |
|
|
\def\defoptx #1 {\errmessage{@defoptx in invalid context}}
|
| 5158 |
|
|
\def\defopx#1 {\errmessage{@defopx in invalid context}}
|
| 5159 |
|
|
\def\defspecx#1 {\errmessage{@defspecx in invalid context}}
|
| 5160 |
|
|
\def\deftpx#1 {\errmessage{@deftpx in invalid context}}
|
| 5161 |
|
|
\def\deftypefnx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefnx in invalid context}}
|
| 5162 |
|
|
\def\deftypefunx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypefunx in invalid context}}
|
| 5163 |
|
|
\def\deftypeivarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeivarx in invalid context}}
|
| 5164 |
|
|
\def\deftypemethodx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypemethodx in invalid context}}
|
| 5165 |
|
|
\def\deftypeopx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypeopx in invalid context}}
|
| 5166 |
|
|
\def\deftypevarx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevarx in invalid context}}
|
| 5167 |
|
|
\def\deftypevrx#1 {\errmessage{@deftypevrx in invalid context}}
|
| 5168 |
|
|
\def\defunx#1 {\errmessage{@defunx in invalid context}}
|
| 5169 |
|
|
\def\defvarx#1 {\errmessage{@defvarx in invalid context}}
|
| 5170 |
|
|
\def\defvrx#1 {\errmessage{@defvrx in invalid context}}
|
| 5171 |
|
|
|
| 5172 |
|
|
|
| 5173 |
|
|
\message{macros,}
|
| 5174 |
|
|
% @macro.
|
| 5175 |
|
|
|
| 5176 |
|
|
% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
|
| 5177 |
|
|
% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
|
| 5178 |
|
|
\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
|
| 5179 |
|
|
\newwrite\macscribble
|
| 5180 |
|
|
\def\scanmacro#1{%
|
| 5181 |
|
|
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
|
| 5182 |
|
|
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
| 5183 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
|
| 5184 |
|
|
% Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
|
| 5185 |
|
|
\toks0={#1\endinput}%
|
| 5186 |
|
|
\immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
|
| 5187 |
|
|
\immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
|
| 5188 |
|
|
\immediate\closeout\macscribble
|
| 5189 |
|
|
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
|
| 5190 |
|
|
\input \jobname.tmp
|
| 5191 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5192 |
|
|
}
|
| 5193 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5194 |
|
|
\def\scanmacro#1{%
|
| 5195 |
|
|
\begingroup \newlinechar`\^^M
|
| 5196 |
|
|
% Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
|
| 5197 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=12 \escapechar=`\@
|
| 5198 |
|
|
\let\xeatspaces\eatspaces\scantokens{#1\endinput}\endgroup}
|
| 5199 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5200 |
|
|
|
| 5201 |
|
|
\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
|
| 5202 |
|
|
\newtoks\macname % Macro name
|
| 5203 |
|
|
\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
|
| 5204 |
|
|
\def\macrolist{} % List of all defined macros in the form
|
| 5205 |
|
|
% \do\macro1\do\macro2...
|
| 5206 |
|
|
|
| 5207 |
|
|
% Utility routines.
|
| 5208 |
|
|
% Thisdoes \let #1 = #2, except with \csnames.
|
| 5209 |
|
|
\def\cslet#1#2{%
|
| 5210 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 5211 |
|
|
\expandafter\let
|
| 5212 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 5213 |
|
|
\csname#1\endcsname
|
| 5214 |
|
|
\csname#2\endcsname}
|
| 5215 |
|
|
|
| 5216 |
|
|
% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
|
| 5217 |
|
|
% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
|
| 5218 |
|
|
{\catcode`\@=11
|
| 5219 |
|
|
\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
|
| 5220 |
|
|
\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
|
| 5221 |
|
|
\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
|
| 5222 |
|
|
\def\unbrace#1{#1}
|
| 5223 |
|
|
\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
|
| 5224 |
|
|
}
|
| 5225 |
|
|
|
| 5226 |
|
|
% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
|
| 5227 |
|
|
{\catcode`\^^M=12\catcode`\Q=3%
|
| 5228 |
|
|
\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
|
| 5229 |
|
|
\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
|
| 5230 |
|
|
\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
|
| 5231 |
|
|
}
|
| 5232 |
|
|
|
| 5233 |
|
|
% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
|
| 5234 |
|
|
% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
|
| 5235 |
|
|
% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
|
| 5236 |
|
|
|
| 5237 |
|
|
% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
|
| 5238 |
|
|
% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
|
| 5239 |
|
|
% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
|
| 5240 |
|
|
|
| 5241 |
|
|
\def\macrobodyctxt{%
|
| 5242 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=12
|
| 5243 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=12
|
| 5244 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=12
|
| 5245 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=12
|
| 5246 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=12
|
| 5247 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=12
|
| 5248 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=12
|
| 5249 |
|
|
\catcode`\{=12
|
| 5250 |
|
|
\catcode`\}=12
|
| 5251 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=12
|
| 5252 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M=12
|
| 5253 |
|
|
\usembodybackslash}
|
| 5254 |
|
|
|
| 5255 |
|
|
\def\macroargctxt{%
|
| 5256 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=12
|
| 5257 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=12
|
| 5258 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=12
|
| 5259 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=12
|
| 5260 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=12
|
| 5261 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=12
|
| 5262 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=12
|
| 5263 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=12
|
| 5264 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=12}
|
| 5265 |
|
|
|
| 5266 |
|
|
% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
|
| 5267 |
|
|
% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
|
| 5268 |
|
|
% where N is the macro parameter number.
|
| 5269 |
|
|
% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
|
| 5270 |
|
|
% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
|
| 5271 |
|
|
|
| 5272 |
|
|
{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
|
| 5273 |
|
|
@gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
|
| 5274 |
|
|
@gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
|
| 5275 |
|
|
}
|
| 5276 |
|
|
\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
|
| 5277 |
|
|
|
| 5278 |
|
|
\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
| 5279 |
|
|
\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
|
| 5280 |
|
|
|
| 5281 |
|
|
\def\macroxxx#1{%
|
| 5282 |
|
|
\getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
|
| 5283 |
|
|
\ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
|
| 5284 |
|
|
\paramno=0%
|
| 5285 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5286 |
|
|
\expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
|
| 5287 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5288 |
|
|
\if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
|
| 5289 |
|
|
\message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
|
| 5290 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5291 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
|
| 5292 |
|
|
\else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
|
| 5293 |
|
|
\global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
|
| 5294 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
|
| 5295 |
|
|
% Add the macroname to \macrolist
|
| 5296 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\do}%
|
| 5297 |
|
|
\xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0
|
| 5298 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname\endcsname}%
|
| 5299 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5300 |
|
|
\begingroup \macrobodyctxt
|
| 5301 |
|
|
\ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
|
| 5302 |
|
|
\else \expandafter\parsemacbody
|
| 5303 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 5304 |
|
|
|
| 5305 |
|
|
\def\unmacro{\parsearg\unmacroxxx}
|
| 5306 |
|
|
\def\unmacroxxx#1{%
|
| 5307 |
|
|
\if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
|
| 5308 |
|
|
\global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
|
| 5309 |
|
|
\global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
|
| 5310 |
|
|
% Remove the macro name from \macrolist
|
| 5311 |
|
|
\begingroup
|
| 5312 |
|
|
\edef\tempa{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}%
|
| 5313 |
|
|
\def\do##1{%
|
| 5314 |
|
|
\def\tempb{##1}%
|
| 5315 |
|
|
\ifx\tempa\tempb
|
| 5316 |
|
|
% remove this
|
| 5317 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5318 |
|
|
\toks0 = \expandafter{\newmacrolist\do}%
|
| 5319 |
|
|
\edef\newmacrolist{\the\toks0\expandafter\noexpand\tempa}%
|
| 5320 |
|
|
\fi}%
|
| 5321 |
|
|
\def\newmacrolist{}%
|
| 5322 |
|
|
% Execute macro list to define \newmacrolist
|
| 5323 |
|
|
\macrolist
|
| 5324 |
|
|
\global\let\macrolist\newmacrolist
|
| 5325 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5326 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5327 |
|
|
\errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
|
| 5328 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5329 |
|
|
}
|
| 5330 |
|
|
|
| 5331 |
|
|
% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
|
| 5332 |
|
|
% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
|
| 5333 |
|
|
% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
|
| 5334 |
|
|
\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
|
| 5335 |
|
|
\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
|
| 5336 |
|
|
\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
|
| 5337 |
|
|
\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
|
| 5338 |
|
|
|
| 5339 |
|
|
% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
|
| 5340 |
|
|
% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
|
| 5341 |
|
|
% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
|
| 5342 |
|
|
% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
|
| 5343 |
|
|
|
| 5344 |
|
|
% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
|
| 5345 |
|
|
% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
|
| 5346 |
|
|
% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
|
| 5347 |
|
|
% it to # just before using the token list produced.
|
| 5348 |
|
|
%
|
| 5349 |
|
|
% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
|
| 5350 |
|
|
% the macro is used.
|
| 5351 |
|
|
|
| 5352 |
|
|
\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
|
| 5353 |
|
|
\let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
|
| 5354 |
|
|
\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
|
| 5355 |
|
|
\if#1;\let\next=\relax
|
| 5356 |
|
|
\else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
|
| 5357 |
|
|
\advance\paramno by 1%
|
| 5358 |
|
|
\expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
|
| 5359 |
|
|
{\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
|
| 5360 |
|
|
\edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
|
| 5361 |
|
|
\fi\next}
|
| 5362 |
|
|
|
| 5363 |
|
|
% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
|
| 5364 |
|
|
% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
|
| 5365 |
|
|
|
| 5366 |
|
|
\long\def\parsemacbody#1@end macro%
|
| 5367 |
|
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
| 5368 |
|
|
\long\def\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro%
|
| 5369 |
|
|
{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
|
| 5370 |
|
|
|
| 5371 |
|
|
% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
|
| 5372 |
|
|
% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
|
| 5373 |
|
|
% Much magic with \expandafter here.
|
| 5374 |
|
|
% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
|
| 5375 |
|
|
% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
|
| 5376 |
|
|
\def\defmacro{%
|
| 5377 |
|
|
\let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
|
| 5378 |
|
|
\ifrecursive
|
| 5379 |
|
|
\ifcase\paramno
|
| 5380 |
|
|
% 0
|
| 5381 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 5382 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| 5383 |
|
|
\or % 1
|
| 5384 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 5385 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 5386 |
|
|
\noexpand\braceorline
|
| 5387 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
| 5388 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 5389 |
|
|
\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| 5390 |
|
|
\else % many
|
| 5391 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 5392 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 5393 |
|
|
\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
| 5394 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 5395 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
| 5396 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 5397 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef
|
| 5398 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 5399 |
|
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
| 5400 |
|
|
\paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
|
| 5401 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5402 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5403 |
|
|
\ifcase\paramno
|
| 5404 |
|
|
% 0
|
| 5405 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 5406 |
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| 5407 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| 5408 |
|
|
\or % 1
|
| 5409 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 5410 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 5411 |
|
|
\noexpand\braceorline
|
| 5412 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
|
| 5413 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 5414 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 5415 |
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| 5416 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| 5417 |
|
|
\else % many
|
| 5418 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
|
| 5419 |
|
|
\bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
|
| 5420 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
|
| 5421 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
|
| 5422 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
|
| 5423 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 5424 |
|
|
\expandafter\xdef
|
| 5425 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter
|
| 5426 |
|
|
\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
|
| 5427 |
|
|
\paramlist{%
|
| 5428 |
|
|
\egroup
|
| 5429 |
|
|
\noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
|
| 5430 |
|
|
\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
|
| 5431 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5432 |
|
|
\fi}
|
| 5433 |
|
|
|
| 5434 |
|
|
\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
|
| 5435 |
|
|
|
| 5436 |
|
|
% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
|
| 5437 |
|
|
% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
|
| 5438 |
|
|
% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
|
| 5439 |
|
|
% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
|
| 5440 |
|
|
\def\braceorline#1{\let\next=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
|
| 5441 |
|
|
\def\braceorlinexxx{%
|
| 5442 |
|
|
\ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
|
| 5443 |
|
|
\expandafter\parsearg
|
| 5444 |
|
|
\fi \next}
|
| 5445 |
|
|
|
| 5446 |
|
|
% We mant to disable all macros during \shipout so that they are not
|
| 5447 |
|
|
% expanded by \write.
|
| 5448 |
|
|
\def\turnoffmacros{\begingroup \def\do##1{\let\noexpand##1=\relax}%
|
| 5449 |
|
|
\edef\next{\macrolist}\expandafter\endgroup\next}
|
| 5450 |
|
|
|
| 5451 |
|
|
|
| 5452 |
|
|
% @alias.
|
| 5453 |
|
|
% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
|
| 5454 |
|
|
% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
|
| 5455 |
|
|
\def\alias{\begingroup\obeyspaces\parsearg\aliasxxx}
|
| 5456 |
|
|
\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
|
| 5457 |
|
|
\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{\ignoreactivespaces
|
| 5458 |
|
|
\edef\next{\global\let\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname=%
|
| 5459 |
|
|
\expandafter\noexpand\csname#2\endcsname}%
|
| 5460 |
|
|
\expandafter\endgroup\next}
|
| 5461 |
|
|
|
| 5462 |
|
|
|
| 5463 |
|
|
\message{cross references,}
|
| 5464 |
|
|
% @xref etc.
|
| 5465 |
|
|
|
| 5466 |
|
|
\newwrite\auxfile
|
| 5467 |
|
|
|
| 5468 |
|
|
\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
|
| 5469 |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
|
| 5470 |
|
|
|
| 5471 |
|
|
% @inforef is relatively simple.
|
| 5472 |
|
|
\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
|
| 5473 |
|
|
\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
|
| 5474 |
|
|
node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
|
| 5475 |
|
|
|
| 5476 |
|
|
% @node's job is to define \lastnode.
|
| 5477 |
|
|
\def\node{\ENVcheck\parsearg\nodezzz}
|
| 5478 |
|
|
\def\nodezzz#1{\nodexxx [#1,]}
|
| 5479 |
|
|
\def\nodexxx[#1,#2]{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
|
| 5480 |
|
|
\let\nwnode=\node
|
| 5481 |
|
|
\let\lastnode=\relax
|
| 5482 |
|
|
|
| 5483 |
|
|
% The sectioning commands (@chapter, etc.) call these.
|
| 5484 |
|
|
\def\donoderef{%
|
| 5485 |
|
|
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
| 5486 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
|
| 5487 |
|
|
{Ysectionnumberandtype}%
|
| 5488 |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
| 5489 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5490 |
|
|
}
|
| 5491 |
|
|
\def\unnumbnoderef{%
|
| 5492 |
|
|
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
| 5493 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}{Ynothing}%
|
| 5494 |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
| 5495 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5496 |
|
|
}
|
| 5497 |
|
|
\def\appendixnoderef{%
|
| 5498 |
|
|
\ifx\lastnode\relax\else
|
| 5499 |
|
|
\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\setref{\lastnode}%
|
| 5500 |
|
|
{Yappendixletterandtype}%
|
| 5501 |
|
|
\global\let\lastnode=\relax
|
| 5502 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5503 |
|
|
}
|
| 5504 |
|
|
|
| 5505 |
|
|
|
| 5506 |
|
|
% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
|
| 5507 |
|
|
%
|
| 5508 |
|
|
\newcount\savesfregister
|
| 5509 |
|
|
\gdef\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
|
| 5510 |
|
|
\gdef\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
|
| 5511 |
|
|
\gdef\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
|
| 5512 |
|
|
|
| 5513 |
|
|
% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME, namely
|
| 5514 |
|
|
% NAME-title, NAME-pg, and NAME-SNT. Called from \foonoderef. We have
|
| 5515 |
|
|
% to set \indexdummies so commands such as @code in a section title
|
| 5516 |
|
|
% aren't expanded. It would be nicer not to expand the titles in the
|
| 5517 |
|
|
% first place, but there's so many layers that that is hard to do.
|
| 5518 |
|
|
%
|
| 5519 |
|
|
\def\setref#1#2{{%
|
| 5520 |
|
|
\indexdummies
|
| 5521 |
|
|
\pdfmkdest{#1}%
|
| 5522 |
|
|
\dosetq{#1-title}{Ytitle}%
|
| 5523 |
|
|
\dosetq{#1-pg}{Ypagenumber}%
|
| 5524 |
|
|
\dosetq{#1-snt}{#2}%
|
| 5525 |
|
|
}}
|
| 5526 |
|
|
|
| 5527 |
|
|
% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
|
| 5528 |
|
|
% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
|
| 5529 |
|
|
% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
|
| 5530 |
|
|
% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
|
| 5531 |
|
|
%
|
| 5532 |
|
|
\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| 5533 |
|
|
\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| 5534 |
|
|
\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
|
| 5535 |
|
|
\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
|
| 5536 |
|
|
\unsepspaces
|
| 5537 |
|
|
\def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
|
| 5538 |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #3}%
|
| 5539 |
|
|
\setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual}%
|
| 5540 |
|
|
\setbox0=\hbox{\printednodename}%
|
| 5541 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
|
| 5542 |
|
|
% No printed node name was explicitly given.
|
| 5543 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
|
| 5544 |
|
|
% Use the node name inside the square brackets.
|
| 5545 |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| 5546 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5547 |
|
|
% Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
|
| 5548 |
|
|
% the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
|
| 5549 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| 5550 |
|
|
% It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
|
| 5551 |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| 5552 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5553 |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
| 5554 |
|
|
% We know the real title if we have the xref values.
|
| 5555 |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
|
| 5556 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5557 |
|
|
% Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
|
| 5558 |
|
|
\def\printednodename{\ignorespaces #1}%
|
| 5559 |
|
|
\fi%
|
| 5560 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5561 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5562 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5563 |
|
|
%
|
| 5564 |
|
|
% If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
|
| 5565 |
|
|
% insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
|
| 5566 |
|
|
% not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
|
| 5567 |
|
|
% are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
|
| 5568 |
|
|
% is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
|
| 5569 |
|
|
% is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
|
| 5570 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 5571 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 5572 |
|
|
\getfilename{#4}%
|
| 5573 |
|
|
{\normalturnoffactive
|
| 5574 |
|
|
\ifnum\filenamelength>0
|
| 5575 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| 5576 |
|
|
goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{#1}%
|
| 5577 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5578 |
|
|
\startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
|
| 5579 |
|
|
goto name{#1}%
|
| 5580 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5581 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5582 |
|
|
\linkcolor
|
| 5583 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5584 |
|
|
%
|
| 5585 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
|
| 5586 |
|
|
\putwordsection{} ``\printednodename'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
|
| 5587 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5588 |
|
|
% _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
|
| 5589 |
|
|
% control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
|
| 5590 |
|
|
% into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
|
| 5591 |
|
|
% printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
|
| 5592 |
|
|
% printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
|
| 5593 |
|
|
{\normalturnoffactive
|
| 5594 |
|
|
% Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
|
| 5595 |
|
|
% @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
|
| 5596 |
|
|
\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
|
| 5597 |
|
|
\ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
|
| 5598 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5599 |
|
|
% [mynode],
|
| 5600 |
|
|
[\printednodename],\space
|
| 5601 |
|
|
% page 3
|
| 5602 |
|
|
\turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
|
| 5603 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5604 |
|
|
\endlink
|
| 5605 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5606 |
|
|
|
| 5607 |
|
|
% \dosetq is the interface for calls from other macros
|
| 5608 |
|
|
|
| 5609 |
|
|
% Use \normalturnoffactive so that punctuation chars such as underscore
|
| 5610 |
|
|
% and backslash work in node names. (\turnoffactive doesn't do \.)
|
| 5611 |
|
|
\def\dosetq#1#2{%
|
| 5612 |
|
|
{\let\folio=0%
|
| 5613 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive
|
| 5614 |
|
|
\edef\next{\write\auxfile{\internalsetq{#1}{#2}}}%
|
| 5615 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 5616 |
|
|
\next
|
| 5617 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5618 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5619 |
|
|
}
|
| 5620 |
|
|
|
| 5621 |
|
|
% \internalsetq {foo}{page} expands into
|
| 5622 |
|
|
% CHARACTERS 'xrdef {foo}{...expansion of \Ypage...}
|
| 5623 |
|
|
% When the aux file is read, ' is the escape character
|
| 5624 |
|
|
|
| 5625 |
|
|
\def\internalsetq #1#2{'xrdef {#1}{\csname #2\endcsname}}
|
| 5626 |
|
|
|
| 5627 |
|
|
% Things to be expanded by \internalsetq
|
| 5628 |
|
|
|
| 5629 |
|
|
\def\Ypagenumber{\folio}
|
| 5630 |
|
|
|
| 5631 |
|
|
\def\Ytitle{\thissection}
|
| 5632 |
|
|
|
| 5633 |
|
|
\def\Ynothing{}
|
| 5634 |
|
|
|
| 5635 |
|
|
\def\Ysectionnumberandtype{%
|
| 5636 |
|
|
\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordChapter\xreftie\the\chapno %
|
| 5637 |
|
|
\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno %
|
| 5638 |
|
|
\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
| 5639 |
|
|
\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
| 5640 |
|
|
\else %
|
| 5641 |
|
|
\putwordSection\xreftie\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
| 5642 |
|
|
\fi \fi \fi }
|
| 5643 |
|
|
|
| 5644 |
|
|
\def\Yappendixletterandtype{%
|
| 5645 |
|
|
\ifnum\secno=0 \putwordAppendix\xreftie'char\the\appendixno{}%
|
| 5646 |
|
|
\else \ifnum \subsecno=0 \putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno %
|
| 5647 |
|
|
\else \ifnum \subsubsecno=0 %
|
| 5648 |
|
|
\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno %
|
| 5649 |
|
|
\else %
|
| 5650 |
|
|
\putwordSection\xreftie'char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno %
|
| 5651 |
|
|
\fi \fi \fi }
|
| 5652 |
|
|
|
| 5653 |
|
|
\gdef\xreftie{'tie}
|
| 5654 |
|
|
|
| 5655 |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
|
| 5656 |
|
|
% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
|
| 5657 |
|
|
%
|
| 5658 |
|
|
\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
|
| 5659 |
|
|
\let\linenumber = \empty % Non-3.0.
|
| 5660 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5661 |
|
|
\def\linenumber{\the\inputlineno:\space}
|
| 5662 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5663 |
|
|
|
| 5664 |
|
|
% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
|
| 5665 |
|
|
% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
|
| 5666 |
|
|
|
| 5667 |
|
|
\def\refx#1#2{%
|
| 5668 |
|
|
\expandafter\ifx\csname X#1\endcsname\relax
|
| 5669 |
|
|
% If not defined, say something at least.
|
| 5670 |
|
|
\angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
|
| 5671 |
|
|
\iflinks
|
| 5672 |
|
|
\ifhavexrefs
|
| 5673 |
|
|
\message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
|
| 5674 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5675 |
|
|
\ifwarnedxrefs\else
|
| 5676 |
|
|
\global\warnedxrefstrue
|
| 5677 |
|
|
\message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
|
| 5678 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5679 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5680 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5681 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5682 |
|
|
% It's defined, so just use it.
|
| 5683 |
|
|
\csname X#1\endcsname
|
| 5684 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5685 |
|
|
#2% Output the suffix in any case.
|
| 5686 |
|
|
}
|
| 5687 |
|
|
|
| 5688 |
|
|
% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.
|
| 5689 |
|
|
%
|
| 5690 |
|
|
\def\xrdef#1{\begingroup
|
| 5691 |
|
|
% Reenable \ as an escape while reading the second argument.
|
| 5692 |
|
|
\catcode`\\ = 0
|
| 5693 |
|
|
\afterassignment\endgroup
|
| 5694 |
|
|
\expandafter\gdef\csname X#1\endcsname
|
| 5695 |
|
|
}
|
| 5696 |
|
|
|
| 5697 |
|
|
% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
|
| 5698 |
|
|
\def\readauxfile{\begingroup
|
| 5699 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^@=\other
|
| 5700 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^A=\other
|
| 5701 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^B=\other
|
| 5702 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^C=\other
|
| 5703 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^D=\other
|
| 5704 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^E=\other
|
| 5705 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^F=\other
|
| 5706 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^G=\other
|
| 5707 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^H=\other
|
| 5708 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^K=\other
|
| 5709 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^L=\other
|
| 5710 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^N=\other
|
| 5711 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^P=\other
|
| 5712 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^Q=\other
|
| 5713 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^R=\other
|
| 5714 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^S=\other
|
| 5715 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^T=\other
|
| 5716 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^U=\other
|
| 5717 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^V=\other
|
| 5718 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^W=\other
|
| 5719 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^X=\other
|
| 5720 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^Z=\other
|
| 5721 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^[=\other
|
| 5722 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^\=\other
|
| 5723 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^]=\other
|
| 5724 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^^=\other
|
| 5725 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^_=\other
|
| 5726 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=\other
|
| 5727 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
| 5728 |
|
|
% It was suggested to define this as 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
|
| 5729 |
|
|
% in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
|
| 5730 |
|
|
% supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
|
| 5731 |
|
|
% that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
|
| 5732 |
|
|
% character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
|
| 5733 |
|
|
% b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
|
| 5734 |
|
|
% argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
|
| 5735 |
|
|
% all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
|
| 5736 |
|
|
%
|
| 5737 |
|
|
% The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
|
| 5738 |
|
|
% \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
|
| 5739 |
|
|
% and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
|
| 5740 |
|
|
%
|
| 5741 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
| 5742 |
|
|
\catcode`\[=\other
|
| 5743 |
|
|
\catcode`\]=\other
|
| 5744 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
| 5745 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
| 5746 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
| 5747 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
| 5748 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
| 5749 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other
|
| 5750 |
|
|
\catcode`\#=\other
|
| 5751 |
|
|
\catcode`\&=\other
|
| 5752 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
|
| 5753 |
|
|
% Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters
|
| 5754 |
|
|
{%
|
| 5755 |
|
|
\count 1=128
|
| 5756 |
|
|
\def\loop{%
|
| 5757 |
|
|
\catcode\count 1=\other
|
| 5758 |
|
|
\advance\count 1 by 1
|
| 5759 |
|
|
\ifnum \count 1<256 \loop \fi
|
| 5760 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5761 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5762 |
|
|
% The aux file uses ' as the escape (for now).
|
| 5763 |
|
|
% Turn off \ as an escape so we do not lose on
|
| 5764 |
|
|
% entries which were dumped with control sequences in their names.
|
| 5765 |
|
|
% For example, 'xrdef {$\leq $-fun}{page ...} made by @defun ^^
|
| 5766 |
|
|
% Reference to such entries still does not work the way one would wish,
|
| 5767 |
|
|
% but at least they do not bomb out when the aux file is read in.
|
| 5768 |
|
|
\catcode`\{=1
|
| 5769 |
|
|
\catcode`\}=2
|
| 5770 |
|
|
\catcode`\%=\other
|
| 5771 |
|
|
\catcode`\'=0
|
| 5772 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\other
|
| 5773 |
|
|
%
|
| 5774 |
|
|
\openin 1 \jobname.aux
|
| 5775 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 5776 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 5777 |
|
|
\input \jobname.aux
|
| 5778 |
|
|
\global\havexrefstrue
|
| 5779 |
|
|
\global\warnedobstrue
|
| 5780 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5781 |
|
|
% Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
|
| 5782 |
|
|
\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
|
| 5783 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5784 |
|
|
|
| 5785 |
|
|
|
| 5786 |
|
|
% Footnotes.
|
| 5787 |
|
|
|
| 5788 |
|
|
\newcount \footnoteno
|
| 5789 |
|
|
|
| 5790 |
|
|
% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
|
| 5791 |
|
|
% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
|
| 5792 |
|
|
% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
|
| 5793 |
|
|
% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
|
| 5794 |
|
|
% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
|
| 5795 |
|
|
\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
|
| 5796 |
|
|
|
| 5797 |
|
|
% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
|
| 5798 |
|
|
\let\footnotestyle=\comment
|
| 5799 |
|
|
|
| 5800 |
|
|
\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
|
| 5801 |
|
|
|
| 5802 |
|
|
{\catcode `\@=11
|
| 5803 |
|
|
%
|
| 5804 |
|
|
% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
|
| 5805 |
|
|
\gdef\footnote{%
|
| 5806 |
|
|
\global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
|
| 5807 |
|
|
\edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
|
| 5808 |
|
|
%
|
| 5809 |
|
|
% In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
|
| 5810 |
|
|
% extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
|
| 5811 |
|
|
\let\@sf\empty
|
| 5812 |
|
|
\ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\/\fi
|
| 5813 |
|
|
%
|
| 5814 |
|
|
% Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
|
| 5815 |
|
|
\unskip
|
| 5816 |
|
|
\thisfootno\@sf
|
| 5817 |
|
|
\footnotezzz
|
| 5818 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5819 |
|
|
|
| 5820 |
|
|
% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
|
| 5821 |
|
|
% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
|
| 5822 |
|
|
%
|
| 5823 |
|
|
% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset and anything else that uses
|
| 5824 |
|
|
% \parseargline fail inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
|
| 5825 |
|
|
% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
|
| 5826 |
|
|
%
|
| 5827 |
|
|
\long\gdef\footnotezzz{\insert\footins\bgroup
|
| 5828 |
|
|
% We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
|
| 5829 |
|
|
% footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
|
| 5830 |
|
|
% So reset some parameters.
|
| 5831 |
|
|
\interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
|
| 5832 |
|
|
\splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
|
| 5833 |
|
|
\splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
|
| 5834 |
|
|
\floatingpenalty\@MM
|
| 5835 |
|
|
\leftskip\z@skip
|
| 5836 |
|
|
\rightskip\z@skip
|
| 5837 |
|
|
\spaceskip\z@skip
|
| 5838 |
|
|
\xspaceskip\z@skip
|
| 5839 |
|
|
\parindent\defaultparindent
|
| 5840 |
|
|
%
|
| 5841 |
|
|
\smallfonts \rm
|
| 5842 |
|
|
%
|
| 5843 |
|
|
% Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
|
| 5844 |
|
|
% to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
|
| 5845 |
|
|
% hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
|
| 5846 |
|
|
% text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
|
| 5847 |
|
|
\let\noindent = \relax
|
| 5848 |
|
|
%
|
| 5849 |
|
|
% Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
|
| 5850 |
|
|
% footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
|
| 5851 |
|
|
\everypar = {\hang}%
|
| 5852 |
|
|
\textindent{\thisfootno}%
|
| 5853 |
|
|
%
|
| 5854 |
|
|
% Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
|
| 5855 |
|
|
% expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
|
| 5856 |
|
|
% provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
|
| 5857 |
|
|
\footstrut
|
| 5858 |
|
|
\futurelet\next\fo@t
|
| 5859 |
|
|
}
|
| 5860 |
|
|
\def\fo@t{\ifcat\bgroup\noexpand\next \let\next\f@@t
|
| 5861 |
|
|
\else\let\next\f@t\fi \next}
|
| 5862 |
|
|
\def\f@@t{\bgroup\aftergroup\@foot\let\next}
|
| 5863 |
|
|
\def\f@t#1{#1\@foot}
|
| 5864 |
|
|
\def\@foot{\strut\par\egroup}
|
| 5865 |
|
|
|
| 5866 |
|
|
}%end \catcode `\@=11
|
| 5867 |
|
|
|
| 5868 |
|
|
% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
|
| 5869 |
|
|
% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
|
| 5870 |
|
|
% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
|
| 5871 |
|
|
% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
|
| 5872 |
|
|
% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
|
| 5873 |
|
|
%
|
| 5874 |
|
|
\def\|{%
|
| 5875 |
|
|
% \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
|
| 5876 |
|
|
\leavevmode
|
| 5877 |
|
|
%
|
| 5878 |
|
|
% Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
|
| 5879 |
|
|
\vadjust{%
|
| 5880 |
|
|
% We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
|
| 5881 |
|
|
% leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
|
| 5882 |
|
|
\vskip-\baselineskip
|
| 5883 |
|
|
%
|
| 5884 |
|
|
% \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
|
| 5885 |
|
|
% the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
|
| 5886 |
|
|
\llap{%
|
| 5887 |
|
|
%
|
| 5888 |
|
|
% For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
|
| 5889 |
|
|
\vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
|
| 5890 |
|
|
%
|
| 5891 |
|
|
% This is the space between the bar and the text.
|
| 5892 |
|
|
\hskip 12pt
|
| 5893 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5894 |
|
|
}%
|
| 5895 |
|
|
}
|
| 5896 |
|
|
|
| 5897 |
|
|
% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
|
| 5898 |
|
|
% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
|
| 5899 |
|
|
% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
|
| 5900 |
|
|
%
|
| 5901 |
|
|
\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
|
| 5902 |
|
|
|
| 5903 |
|
|
% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
|
| 5904 |
|
|
% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
|
| 5905 |
|
|
%
|
| 5906 |
|
|
% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
|
| 5907 |
|
|
% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
|
| 5908 |
|
|
% undone and the next image would fail.
|
| 5909 |
|
|
\openin 1 = epsf.tex
|
| 5910 |
|
|
\ifeof 1 \else
|
| 5911 |
|
|
\closein 1
|
| 5912 |
|
|
% Do not bother showing banner with post-v2.7 epsf.tex (available in
|
| 5913 |
|
|
% doc/epsf.tex until it shows up on ctan).
|
| 5914 |
|
|
\def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
|
| 5915 |
|
|
\input epsf.tex
|
| 5916 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5917 |
|
|
%
|
| 5918 |
|
|
% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
|
| 5919 |
|
|
\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
|
| 5920 |
|
|
\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
|
| 5921 |
|
|
work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
|
| 5922 |
|
|
it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
|
| 5923 |
|
|
%
|
| 5924 |
|
|
\def\image#1{%
|
| 5925 |
|
|
\ifx\epsfbox\undefined
|
| 5926 |
|
|
\ifwarnednoepsf \else
|
| 5927 |
|
|
\errhelp = \noepsfhelp
|
| 5928 |
|
|
\errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
|
| 5929 |
|
|
\global\warnednoepsftrue
|
| 5930 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5931 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5932 |
|
|
\imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
|
| 5933 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5934 |
|
|
}
|
| 5935 |
|
|
%
|
| 5936 |
|
|
% Arguments to @image:
|
| 5937 |
|
|
% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
|
| 5938 |
|
|
% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
|
| 5939 |
|
|
% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
|
| 5940 |
|
|
% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
|
| 5941 |
|
|
% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
|
| 5942 |
|
|
\newif\ifimagevmode
|
| 5943 |
|
|
\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
|
| 5944 |
|
|
\catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
|
| 5945 |
|
|
\normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
|
| 5946 |
|
|
% If the image is by itself, center it.
|
| 5947 |
|
|
\ifvmode
|
| 5948 |
|
|
\imagevmodetrue
|
| 5949 |
|
|
\nobreak\bigskip
|
| 5950 |
|
|
% Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
|
| 5951 |
|
|
% \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
|
| 5952 |
|
|
% above and below.
|
| 5953 |
|
|
\nobreak\vskip\parskip
|
| 5954 |
|
|
\nobreak
|
| 5955 |
|
|
\line\bgroup\hss
|
| 5956 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5957 |
|
|
%
|
| 5958 |
|
|
% Output the image.
|
| 5959 |
|
|
\ifpdf
|
| 5960 |
|
|
\dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
|
| 5961 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5962 |
|
|
% \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
|
| 5963 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
|
| 5964 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
|
| 5965 |
|
|
\epsfbox{#1.eps}%
|
| 5966 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5967 |
|
|
%
|
| 5968 |
|
|
\ifimagevmode \hss \egroup \bigbreak \fi % space after the image
|
| 5969 |
|
|
\endgroup}
|
| 5970 |
|
|
|
| 5971 |
|
|
|
| 5972 |
|
|
\message{localization,}
|
| 5973 |
|
|
% and i18n.
|
| 5974 |
|
|
|
| 5975 |
|
|
% @documentlanguage is usually given very early, just after
|
| 5976 |
|
|
% @setfilename. If done too late, it may not override everything
|
| 5977 |
|
|
% properly. Single argument is the language abbreviation.
|
| 5978 |
|
|
% It would be nice if we could set up a hyphenation file here.
|
| 5979 |
|
|
%
|
| 5980 |
|
|
\def\documentlanguage{\parsearg\dodocumentlanguage}
|
| 5981 |
|
|
\def\dodocumentlanguage#1{%
|
| 5982 |
|
|
\tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
|
| 5983 |
|
|
% Read the file if it exists.
|
| 5984 |
|
|
\openin 1 txi-#1.tex
|
| 5985 |
|
|
\ifeof1
|
| 5986 |
|
|
\errhelp = \nolanghelp
|
| 5987 |
|
|
\errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
|
| 5988 |
|
|
\let\temp = \relax
|
| 5989 |
|
|
\else
|
| 5990 |
|
|
\def\temp{\input txi-#1.tex }%
|
| 5991 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 5992 |
|
|
\temp
|
| 5993 |
|
|
\endgroup
|
| 5994 |
|
|
}
|
| 5995 |
|
|
\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
|
| 5996 |
|
|
is empty. Maybe you need to install it? In the current directory
|
| 5997 |
|
|
should work if nowhere else does.}
|
| 5998 |
|
|
|
| 5999 |
|
|
|
| 6000 |
|
|
% @documentencoding should change something in TeX eventually, most
|
| 6001 |
|
|
% likely, but for now just recognize it.
|
| 6002 |
|
|
\let\documentencoding = \comment
|
| 6003 |
|
|
|
| 6004 |
|
|
|
| 6005 |
|
|
% Page size parameters.
|
| 6006 |
|
|
%
|
| 6007 |
|
|
\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
|
| 6008 |
|
|
|
| 6009 |
|
|
\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
|
| 6010 |
|
|
\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
|
| 6011 |
|
|
\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
|
| 6012 |
|
|
|
| 6013 |
|
|
% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
|
| 6014 |
|
|
\vbadness = 10000
|
| 6015 |
|
|
|
| 6016 |
|
|
% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
|
| 6017 |
|
|
\hbadness = 2000
|
| 6018 |
|
|
|
| 6019 |
|
|
% Following George Bush, just get rid of widows and orphans.
|
| 6020 |
|
|
\widowpenalty=10000
|
| 6021 |
|
|
\clubpenalty=10000
|
| 6022 |
|
|
|
| 6023 |
|
|
% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
|
| 6024 |
|
|
% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
|
| 6025 |
|
|
% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
|
| 6026 |
|
|
% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
|
| 6027 |
|
|
%
|
| 6028 |
|
|
\def\setemergencystretch{%
|
| 6029 |
|
|
\ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
|
| 6030 |
|
|
% Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
|
| 6031 |
|
|
\def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
|
| 6032 |
|
|
\else
|
| 6033 |
|
|
\emergencystretch = .15\hsize
|
| 6034 |
|
|
\fi
|
| 6035 |
|
|
}
|
| 6036 |
|
|
|
| 6037 |
|
|
% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth; 3) voffset;
|
| 6038 |
|
|
% 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip. We also call
|
| 6039 |
|
|
% \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define \textleading.
|
| 6040 |
|
|
% The caller should also set \parskip.
|
| 6041 |
|
|
%
|
| 6042 |
|
|
\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
|
| 6043 |
|
|
\voffset = #3\relax
|
| 6044 |
|
|
\topskip = #6\relax
|
| 6045 |
|
|
\splittopskip = \topskip
|
| 6046 |
|
|
%
|
| 6047 |
|
|
\vsize = #1\relax
|
| 6048 |
|
|
\advance\vsize by \topskip
|
| 6049 |
|
|
\outervsize = \vsize
|
| 6050 |
|
|
\advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
|
| 6051 |
|
|
\pageheight = \vsize
|
| 6052 |
|
|
%
|
| 6053 |
|
|
\hsize = #2\relax
|
| 6054 |
|
|
\outerhsize = \hsize
|
| 6055 |
|
|
\advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
|
| 6056 |
|
|
\pagewidth = \hsize
|
| 6057 |
|
|
%
|
| 6058 |
|
|
\normaloffset = #4\relax
|
| 6059 |
|
|
\bindingoffset = #5\relax
|
| 6060 |
|
|
%
|
| 6061 |
|
|
\setleading{\textleading}
|
| 6062 |
|
|
%
|
| 6063 |
|
|
\parindent = \defaultparindent
|
| 6064 |
|
|
\setemergencystretch
|
| 6065 |
|
|
}
|
| 6066 |
|
|
|
| 6067 |
|
|
% Use `small' versions.
|
| 6068 |
|
|
%
|
| 6069 |
|
|
\def\smallenvironments{%
|
| 6070 |
|
|
\let\smalldisplay = \smalldisplayx
|
| 6071 |
|
|
\let\smallexample = \smalllispx
|
| 6072 |
|
|
\let\smallformat = \smallformatx
|
| 6073 |
|
|
\let\smalllisp = \smalllispx
|
| 6074 |
|
|
}
|
| 6075 |
|
|
|
| 6076 |
|
|
% @letterpaper (the default).
|
| 6077 |
|
|
\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 6078 |
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| 6079 |
|
|
\textleading = 13.2pt
|
| 6080 |
|
|
%
|
| 6081 |
|
|
% If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
|
| 6082 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{46\baselineskip}{6in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
|
| 6083 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6084 |
|
|
|
| 6085 |
|
|
% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.5 (or so) format.
|
| 6086 |
|
|
\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 6087 |
|
|
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
|
| 6088 |
|
|
\textleading = 12pt
|
| 6089 |
|
|
%
|
| 6090 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5.in}{\voffset}{.25in}{\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
|
| 6091 |
|
|
%
|
| 6092 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.3in
|
| 6093 |
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
| 6094 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
| 6095 |
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0pt
|
| 6096 |
|
|
\deftypemargin = 0pt
|
| 6097 |
|
|
\defbodyindent = .5cm
|
| 6098 |
|
|
\smallenvironments
|
| 6099 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6100 |
|
|
|
| 6101 |
|
|
% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
|
| 6102 |
|
|
\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 6103 |
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| 6104 |
|
|
\textleading = 12pt
|
| 6105 |
|
|
%
|
| 6106 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{53\baselineskip}{160mm}{\voffset}{4mm}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
| 6107 |
|
|
%
|
| 6108 |
|
|
\tolerance = 700
|
| 6109 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1pt
|
| 6110 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6111 |
|
|
|
| 6112 |
|
|
% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
|
| 6113 |
|
|
% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
|
| 6114 |
|
|
% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
|
| 6115 |
|
|
\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 6116 |
|
|
\parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
|
| 6117 |
|
|
\textleading = 12.5pt
|
| 6118 |
|
|
%
|
| 6119 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{166mm}{120mm}{\voffset}{-8mm}{\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
|
| 6120 |
|
|
%
|
| 6121 |
|
|
\lispnarrowing = 0.2in
|
| 6122 |
|
|
\tolerance = 800
|
| 6123 |
|
|
\hfuzz = 1.2pt
|
| 6124 |
|
|
\contentsrightmargin = 0mm
|
| 6125 |
|
|
\deftypemargin = 0pt
|
| 6126 |
|
|
\defbodyindent = 2mm
|
| 6127 |
|
|
\tableindent = 12mm
|
| 6128 |
|
|
%
|
| 6129 |
|
|
\smallenvironments
|
| 6130 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6131 |
|
|
|
| 6132 |
|
|
% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper. Top margin
|
| 6133 |
|
|
% 29mm, hence bottom margin 28mm, nominal side margin 3cm.
|
| 6134 |
|
|
\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
|
| 6135 |
|
|
\textleading = 13.6pt
|
| 6136 |
|
|
%
|
| 6137 |
|
|
\afourpaper
|
| 6138 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}{3.6mm}{3.6mm}{3mm}{7mm}%
|
| 6139 |
|
|
%
|
| 6140 |
|
|
% Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper, apparently,
|
| 6141 |
|
|
% although this does not entirely make sense.
|
| 6142 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 0
|
| 6143 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6144 |
|
|
|
| 6145 |
|
|
% Use @afourwide to print on European A4 paper in wide format.
|
| 6146 |
|
|
\def\afourwide{%
|
| 6147 |
|
|
\afourpaper
|
| 6148 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{6.5in}{9.5in}{\hoffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
|
| 6149 |
|
|
}
|
| 6150 |
|
|
|
| 6151 |
|
|
% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
|
| 6152 |
|
|
% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
|
| 6153 |
|
|
% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
|
| 6154 |
|
|
%
|
| 6155 |
|
|
\def\pagesizes{\parsearg\pagesizesxxx}
|
| 6156 |
|
|
\def\pagesizesxxx#1{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
|
| 6157 |
|
|
\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
|
| 6158 |
|
|
\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
|
| 6159 |
|
|
\globaldefs = 1
|
| 6160 |
|
|
%
|
| 6161 |
|
|
\parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
|
| 6162 |
|
|
\setleading{\textleading}%
|
| 6163 |
|
|
%
|
| 6164 |
|
|
\internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}{\voffset}{\normaloffset}{\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
|
| 6165 |
|
|
}}
|
| 6166 |
|
|
|
| 6167 |
|
|
% Set default to letter.
|
| 6168 |
|
|
%
|
| 6169 |
|
|
\letterpaper
|
| 6170 |
|
|
|
| 6171 |
|
|
|
| 6172 |
|
|
\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
|
| 6173 |
|
|
|
| 6174 |
|
|
% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
|
| 6175 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\other
|
| 6176 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\other
|
| 6177 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\other
|
| 6178 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\other
|
| 6179 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\other
|
| 6180 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\other
|
| 6181 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\other
|
| 6182 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\other
|
| 6183 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\other
|
| 6184 |
|
|
\def\normaldoublequote{"}
|
| 6185 |
|
|
\def\normaltilde{~}
|
| 6186 |
|
|
\def\normalcaret{^}
|
| 6187 |
|
|
\def\normalunderscore{_}
|
| 6188 |
|
|
\def\normalverticalbar{|}
|
| 6189 |
|
|
\def\normalless{<}
|
| 6190 |
|
|
\def\normalgreater{>}
|
| 6191 |
|
|
\def\normalplus{+}
|
| 6192 |
|
|
\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
|
| 6193 |
|
|
|
| 6194 |
|
|
% This macro is used to make a character print one way in ttfont
|
| 6195 |
|
|
% where it can probably just be output, and another way in other fonts,
|
| 6196 |
|
|
% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
|
| 6197 |
|
|
%
|
| 6198 |
|
|
% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
|
| 6199 |
|
|
% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
|
| 6200 |
|
|
% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
|
| 6201 |
|
|
% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
|
| 6202 |
|
|
%
|
| 6203 |
|
|
\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
| 6204 |
|
|
|
| 6205 |
|
|
% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
|
| 6206 |
|
|
% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
|
| 6207 |
|
|
% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
|
| 6208 |
|
|
% this is not a problem.
|
| 6209 |
|
|
\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
|
| 6210 |
|
|
|
| 6211 |
|
|
% Turn off all special characters except @
|
| 6212 |
|
|
% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
|
| 6213 |
|
|
% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
|
| 6214 |
|
|
% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
|
| 6215 |
|
|
|
| 6216 |
|
|
\catcode`\"=\active
|
| 6217 |
|
|
\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
|
| 6218 |
|
|
\let"=\activedoublequote
|
| 6219 |
|
|
\catcode`\~=\active
|
| 6220 |
|
|
\def~{{\tt\char126}}
|
| 6221 |
|
|
\chardef\hat=`\^
|
| 6222 |
|
|
\catcode`\^=\active
|
| 6223 |
|
|
\def^{{\tt \hat}}
|
| 6224 |
|
|
|
| 6225 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
| 6226 |
|
|
\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
|
| 6227 |
|
|
% Subroutine for the previous macro.
|
| 6228 |
|
|
\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.06em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}}
|
| 6229 |
|
|
|
| 6230 |
|
|
\catcode`\|=\active
|
| 6231 |
|
|
\def|{{\tt\char124}}
|
| 6232 |
|
|
\chardef \less=`\<
|
| 6233 |
|
|
\catcode`\<=\active
|
| 6234 |
|
|
\def<{{\tt \less}}
|
| 6235 |
|
|
\chardef \gtr=`\>
|
| 6236 |
|
|
\catcode`\>=\active
|
| 6237 |
|
|
\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
|
| 6238 |
|
|
\catcode`\+=\active
|
| 6239 |
|
|
\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
|
| 6240 |
|
|
\catcode`\$=\active
|
| 6241 |
|
|
\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
| 6242 |
|
|
%\catcode 27=\active
|
| 6243 |
|
|
%\def^^[{$\diamondsuit$}
|
| 6244 |
|
|
|
| 6245 |
|
|
% Set up an active definition for =, but don't enable it most of the time.
|
| 6246 |
|
|
{\catcode`\==\active
|
| 6247 |
|
|
\global\def={{\tt \char 61}}}
|
| 6248 |
|
|
|
| 6249 |
|
|
\catcode`+=\active
|
| 6250 |
|
|
\catcode`\_=\active
|
| 6251 |
|
|
|
| 6252 |
|
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
|
| 6253 |
|
|
% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
|
| 6254 |
|
|
% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
|
| 6255 |
|
|
% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
|
| 6256 |
|
|
\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
|
| 6257 |
|
|
|
| 6258 |
|
|
\catcode`\@=0
|
| 6259 |
|
|
|
| 6260 |
|
|
% \rawbackslashxx output one backslash character in current font
|
| 6261 |
|
|
\global\chardef\rawbackslashxx=`\\
|
| 6262 |
|
|
%{\catcode`\\=\other
|
| 6263 |
|
|
%@gdef@rawbackslashxx{\}}
|
| 6264 |
|
|
|
| 6265 |
|
|
% \rawbackslash redefines \ as input to do \rawbackslashxx.
|
| 6266 |
|
|
{\catcode`\\=\active
|
| 6267 |
|
|
@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@rawbackslashxx }}
|
| 6268 |
|
|
|
| 6269 |
|
|
% \normalbackslash outputs one backslash in fixed width font.
|
| 6270 |
|
|
\def\normalbackslash{{\tt\rawbackslashxx}}
|
| 6271 |
|
|
|
| 6272 |
|
|
% \catcode 17=0 % Define control-q
|
| 6273 |
|
|
\catcode`\\=\active
|
| 6274 |
|
|
|
| 6275 |
|
|
% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters
|
| 6276 |
|
|
% even after parsing them.
|
| 6277 |
|
|
@def@turnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
| 6278 |
|
|
@let\=@realbackslash
|
| 6279 |
|
|
@let~=@normaltilde
|
| 6280 |
|
|
@let^=@normalcaret
|
| 6281 |
|
|
@let_=@normalunderscore
|
| 6282 |
|
|
@let|=@normalverticalbar
|
| 6283 |
|
|
@let<=@normalless
|
| 6284 |
|
|
@let>=@normalgreater
|
| 6285 |
|
|
@let+=@normalplus
|
| 6286 |
|
|
@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
| 6287 |
|
|
|
| 6288 |
|
|
@def@normalturnoffactive{@let"=@normaldoublequote
|
| 6289 |
|
|
@let\=@normalbackslash
|
| 6290 |
|
|
@let~=@normaltilde
|
| 6291 |
|
|
@let^=@normalcaret
|
| 6292 |
|
|
@let_=@normalunderscore
|
| 6293 |
|
|
@let|=@normalverticalbar
|
| 6294 |
|
|
@let<=@normalless
|
| 6295 |
|
|
@let>=@normalgreater
|
| 6296 |
|
|
@let+=@normalplus
|
| 6297 |
|
|
@let$=@normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
|
| 6298 |
|
|
|
| 6299 |
|
|
% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
|
| 6300 |
|
|
% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
|
| 6301 |
|
|
@otherifyactive
|
| 6302 |
|
|
|
| 6303 |
|
|
% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
|
| 6304 |
|
|
% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
|
| 6305 |
|
|
% a backslash.
|
| 6306 |
|
|
%
|
| 6307 |
|
|
@gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
|
| 6308 |
|
|
@global@let\ = @eatinput
|
| 6309 |
|
|
|
| 6310 |
|
|
% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
|
| 6311 |
|
|
% the first `\{ in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
|
| 6312 |
|
|
% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
|
| 6313 |
|
|
% Also back turn on active characters that might appear in the input
|
| 6314 |
|
|
% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
|
| 6315 |
|
|
%
|
| 6316 |
|
|
@gdef@fixbackslash{%
|
| 6317 |
|
|
@ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
|
| 6318 |
|
|
@catcode`+=@active
|
| 6319 |
|
|
@catcode`@_=@active
|
| 6320 |
|
|
}
|
| 6321 |
|
|
|
| 6322 |
|
|
% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
|
| 6323 |
|
|
@escapechar = `@@
|
| 6324 |
|
|
|
| 6325 |
|
|
% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
|
| 6326 |
|
|
@catcode`@& = @other
|
| 6327 |
|
|
@catcode`@# = @other
|
| 6328 |
|
|
@catcode`@% = @other
|
| 6329 |
|
|
|
| 6330 |
|
|
@c Set initial fonts.
|
| 6331 |
|
|
@textfonts
|
| 6332 |
|
|
@rm
|
| 6333 |
|
|
|
| 6334 |
|
|
|
| 6335 |
|
|
@c Local variables:
|
| 6336 |
|
|
@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
|
| 6337 |
|
|
@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
|
| 6338 |
|
|
@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
|
| 6339 |
|
|
@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
|
| 6340 |
|
|
@c time-stamp-end: "}"
|
| 6341 |
|
|
@c End:
|